JP2018082908A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of excellently improving the interest of a player in games.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: information acquisition means for acquiring a first special information on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition and acquiring a second special information on the basis of the establishment of a second acquisition condition; giving determination means for performing a giving determination as to whether the first special information and the second special information that have been acquired correspond to a winning/losing information group in giving information; privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege game mode on the basis of the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means having become a giving correspondence result corresponding to the winning/losing information group; and game mode selection means for selecting one post privilege game mode among the plurality of post privilege game modes, as a post privilege game mode after a privilege game is finished, when a result of the giving determination by the giving determination means becomes the giving correspondence result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a bonus gaming mode such as a hit gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area A lottery will be held. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game mode, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is opened and closed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, Some have been proposed to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the privilege game mode (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball enters one of the first start port and the second start port until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the bonus game mode ends. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode (high frequency support mode) that is easy.

JP 2004-41547 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  An object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can raise a player's interest in a game favorably in view of the said point.

  According to the first aspect of the invention for achieving the above object, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area and a first acquisition condition set in advance are established based on a launch operation by a player. Information acquisition means for acquiring the first special information based on the first acquisition information and acquiring the second special information based on the fact that a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is satisfied, and the acquired first The grant determination means for executing whether or not the special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the first special information to be determined Or a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege game mode based on the fact that the second special information corresponds to the success / failure information group, and a result of the grant determination by the grant determining means. Grant If it becomes a response result, the game mode selection means for selecting one post-reward game mode from a plurality of post-reward game modes as a post-reward game mode after the end of the bonus game is provided. Yes.

  According to this, when the first special information or the second special information is a result of granting, one post-reward game mode is selected from the plurality of post-reward game modes. For this reason, the player may be able to experience a plurality of bonus post-game modes. Therefore, the range of games can be widened, and the player's interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, in the configuration provided with a start ball entering portion that is provided in a game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, the “information acquisition means” indicates that “a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. Instead of the configuration of “obtaining special information based on”, a configuration of “acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entering portion” may be adopted.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the main components of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a variable normal winning apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship of a variable normal winning apparatus, a left side discharge path, and a right side discharge path. It is a mimetic diagram showing a down flow course of a game ball at the time of hitting the game ball to the right. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electrical structure in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st reservation area. (A) is a figure which shows the special symbol propriety table for low probability modes, (b) is a figure which shows the special symbol propriety table for high probability modes. It is a figure for demonstrating the allocation table storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-electric player state grasping | ascertainment process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-electric actor state grasping | ascertainment process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure special electricity address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a general-purpose ordinary telephone address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demonstration display performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in audio | voice side MPU. 37 is a flowchart showing main-side command response processing following FIG. 36. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the image for demonstrating the game method displayed on a symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is a figure for demonstrating the game method displayed on a symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the separate response | compatibility process performed with display side MPU. (A) is a diagram showing that the first non-electric actor displayed on the symbol display device is in an open state, (b) is that the second non-electric actor displayed on the symbol display device is in an open state. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed in display side MPU. (A) is a figure which shows the first image in the time reduction mode displayed on a symbol display device, (b) is the image at the time of the 1st lottery game in the time reduction mode displayed on a symbol display device being performed. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the image at the time of the 2nd lottery game in the time reduction mode displayed on a symbol display device being performed, (b) is the continuation effect in the time reduction mode displayed on a symbol display device. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the image when the time-short mode displayed on a symbol display apparatus is complete | finished, (b) is a figure which shows the image when the time-short mode displayed on a symbol display apparatus continues. It is a figure which mainly shows the electric constitution of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a figure which shows the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) is the distribution for 2nd result display parts. It is a figure which shows a table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a figure which shows the first image in the high frequency support mode displayed on a symbol display apparatus, (b ) Is a diagram showing a continuous effect during the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a figure which shows the image when the high frequency support mode displayed on a symbol display apparatus is complete | finished, ( b) is a diagram showing an image when the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device continues. It is a figure for demonstrating the game method displayed on the symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the game method displayed on the symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is how a game ball is fired when it is estimated that the player is in the low probability mode. (B) is a figure which shows the method of discharge | release of a game ball | bowl when a player estimates that it is a high probability mode. It is a figure which mainly shows the electric constitution of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the success / failure lottery etc. in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st reservation area in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a main controller in a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution table in 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a figure which shows the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) is the distribution for 2nd result display parts. It is a figure which shows a table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the game method displayed on the symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the method of discharge | release of a game ball | bowl when a player places emphasis on the number of time-saving modes. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating how the game ball is fired when the player places an emphasis on the opening / closing execution mode. It is a front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the distribution unit vicinity in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution operation | movement of the game ball of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a variable normal winning apparatus, (b) is the positional relationship of a variable normal winning apparatus, a left side discharge path, and a right side discharge path. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a flowchart which shows the non-electric utility state grasping | ascertainment process performed in main side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram in 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a variable normal winning apparatus, (b) is the positional relationship of a variable normal winning apparatus, a left side discharge path, and a right side discharge path. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the non-electric player state grasping | ascertainment process performed in main side MPU in 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the method of discharge | release of the game ball for making the 1st non-electric actor displayed on the symbol display apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment of this invention into an open state.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equivalent to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. 11 and a gaming machine main body 12 that is pivotably attached to the front. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility in the game hall.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame 13. 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable / closable) with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (others with respect to the rotation center) as viewed from the front. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be able to rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so that the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side and can be rotated rearward in a front view. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 has a locked state in which the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the front end side of the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of bringing 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 opened in a substantially rectangular shape at a substantially central portion. It has been. A window panel 22 having two glass plates that are colorless and transparent is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and a front surface (game area) of a game board 43 to be described later is connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side. Note that the window panel 22 may be formed of a synthetic resin so as to be colorless and transparent instead of the plate glass.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 includes an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 that are projected below the window portion 21 and projecting forward of the front door frame 14. Are lined up and down. As shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, so that a game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening portion is inclined downward toward the right side of the front view (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is placed (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to a game ball launching mechanism (launching means) 44 described later.

  Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operation means) at a substantially central portion of an upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened). A second frame button 27 (operation means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated when changing the displayed stage (background) or displaying the chance up effect of the reach effect or the effect of the notice character displayed on the symbol display device 80 to be described later. The The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, light amount, or the like controlled by an audio lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape when viewed from above, but the shape of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be appropriately changed.

  The stage is a production (background) mode that provides uniformity in the production displayed on the symbol display device 80. In the pachinko machine 10, the “underwater stage”, “beach stage”, “city stage” 3 stages are provided. Various effects such as reach effects, which will be described later, are set to be effects that match the theme corresponding to each stage. The stage is changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period when the variable display is not performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 76) described later and during a predetermined period when the variable display is performed. When the first frame button 26 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “underwater stage” → “beach stage” → “city stage” → “underwater stage”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side in front of the second frame button 27. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 28 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine. In this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. Thereby, the common use of the pachinko machine (CR machine) and cash machine using a card unit can be aimed at.

  Inside the lower bulging portion 24, there is provided a lower plate 30 that opens upward similarly to the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. Note that game balls paid out from a payout device 99 provided on the back pack unit 15 to be described later are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 that is operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front surface of a game board 43 described later is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 30 as viewed from the front. . Inside the operation handle 31, there is a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is touched by a player, and even if the player is rotating the operation handle 31, the game ball A push button type stop switch 31b for stopping the firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electric resistance are incorporated. When the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. The game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the game value, so that the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 (to be described later) with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball removal lever 32 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower plate 30 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 30 downward. The ball release lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction. When the ball release lever 32 is slid to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. Discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 32 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

  In addition, the front door frame 14 is provided with an electrical decoration portion 33 that incorporates light emitting means such as an LED around the window portion 21, and a pair of speaker portions 34 at both left and right end portions above the window portion 21. Is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, at the time of hitting or at the time of reach production, each lighting unit 33 is lit or blinking to notify that it is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. It is configured to enhance the effect of the game during the game by notifying the player that the player is hitting or reaching. Moreover, the electrical decoration part 33 also exhibits the function as an error lamp which blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, a plated member 35 made of ABS resin with chrome plating is attached to the area around the electric decoration part 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the center of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. A game board 43 shown in FIG. 5 is detachably attached to the resin base 41, and a game ball launching mechanism 44 that launches a game ball onto the front area of the game board 43 is disposed. The game ball launching mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and a launch rail 45 extending toward a guide rail described later, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 25 on the launch rail 45. And a launching solenoid 47 which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied on the firing rail 45 toward the guide rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails 51 for ball guidance, a windmill 52, an inner rail 53, an outer rail 54, a general winning opening on the front surface of a base plate 50 formed of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 55, 1st start opening 56, 1st special start opening (1st start entry part) 57, 2nd special start opening (2nd start entry part) 58, variable ordinary winning device (ordinary winning means) 59, variable A large winning device (variable large winning means) 60, a normal symbol starting gate 61, a variable display device unit 62, and the like are assembled. The general winning port 55, the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port 58, the variable ordinary winning device 59, the variable large winning device 60, the normal symbol starting gate 61, and the variable display device unit 62. Are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. And such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the center part of the front surface can be visually recognized through the window part 21 of the front door frame 14. Yes.

  The game board 43 includes a general winning port 55, a first starting port 56, a first special starting port 57, a second special starting port 58, a variable ordinary winning device 59, a variable large winning device 60, and a normal symbol starting gate. Corresponding to 61, detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, and 69a (see FIG. 11, 68a and 69a also refer to FIG. 6B) are provided. Then, a general winning opening 55, a first starting opening 56, a first special starting opening 57, a second special starting opening 58, a variable ordinary winning apparatus 59, a variable large winning apparatus 60, and a normal symbol starting gate 61 are generated. Then, a corresponding ball is detected by a corresponding detection sensor, and a detection result is output to a main control device 91 described later. As will be described later, the detection sensors 68a and 69a corresponding to the variable normal winning device 59 are respectively provided in the left discharge passage 68 and the right discharge passage 69 through which the game balls that have entered the variable normal winning device 59 are discharged. ing. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensor, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the entry of game balls.

  In addition, when occurrence of a ball entering the general winning port 55, the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port 58, the variable ordinary winning device 59, and the variable big winning device 60 is detected, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning opening 55, and 15 game balls when a ball enters the variable prize device 60. When the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port 58, or the variable ordinary winning device 59 is entered, three game balls are paid out. It is supposed to be executed. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls may be different depending on whether the first special start opening 57 is won or the second special start opening 58 is won. Further, the number of winning balls for entering the variable prize winning device 60 is not limited to the configuration in which the number of winning balls is larger than the number of other winning balls. For example, the number of winning balls for entering the variable prize winning device 60 is the general winning prize. It is good also as a structure smaller than the number of prize balls with respect to the entrance to the mouth 55.

  The inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54 are formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54, and a game ball launching mechanism The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin-made connecting member 63 that connects the lower right end portion of the inner rail 53 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 54 in a front view is disposed. Yes. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 53, the outer rail 54, and the connecting member 63, and an area in which a game is played by the behavior of the game ball (the game ball that has been fired) Is the area where water flows down).

  Further, a return ball preventing member 64 is attached to the front end side of the inner rail 53 (upper left portion in FIG. 5), and the game ball once fired to the upper portion (game area) of the game board 43 is guided rail (inner rail 53). And the outer rail 54). Then, a return rubber 65 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 54 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 65. The momentum is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first start port 56, the first special start port 57, and the second special start port 58 can receive game balls, and the first start port 56 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 43 as viewed from the front. The first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 are disposed on the lower right side of the game board 43 as viewed from the front (the right side of the first start port 56). The first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 will be described in further detail. In the present embodiment, the first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 are arranged in the vertical direction of the game board 43, and Two special start ports 58 are disposed above the first special start port 57.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port 56 is arranged so that the game ball can enter when the game ball is fired so as to pass the left side of the front of the symbol display device 80 described later. The first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 allow the game ball to enter when the player fires the game ball so as to pass the right side of the front of the symbol display device 80 described later. It is arranged. In other words, the first starting port 56 is disposed so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter when the game ball is fired so as to pass the right side of the front of the symbol display device 80 described later. The first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 are arranged so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter when the player launches the game ball so as to pass the left side of the front of the symbol display device 80 described later. It is installed. Hereinafter, it is also possible that the player launches the game ball so as to pass the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 to be described later, or that the player strikes the game ball to the left, or the player displays the symbol display device 80 to be described later. Launching a game ball so as to pass the right side of the front view is also referred to as a player hitting the game ball to the right.

  When a game ball enters the first start port 56, the corresponding detection sensor 56a (see FIG. 11) detects the game ball entering. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first special start port 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 11) detects the entry of the game ball. Further, when a game ball enters the second special start port 58, the corresponding detection sensor 58a (see FIG. 11) detects the entry of the game ball. And each detection result is output with respect to the main controller 91 which will be described later, and the main controller 91 determines whether or not a special symbol is hit (determines whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode). A display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the symbol display device 80 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the first special start port 57 is provided with a first non-electric component (non-electric component) 66. The first non-electric player 66 is configured to be openable and closable. When the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state, the first non-electric player 66 constitutes a state in which a game ball easily enters the first special start port 57 and is in a closed state. The game ball is less likely to enter the first special start port 57 than when it is in the open state.

  Although the description of the specific configuration of the first non-electric component 66 is omitted, the first non-electric component 66 is mechanically connected to a first non-electric component operating mechanism 70 described later. When the game ball contacts (enters) the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 (by the weight of the game ball), the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 is released. And the 1st non-electric player 66 will be in a closed state when a predetermined number of game balls (two in this embodiment) enter into the 1st special starting port 57. FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, after the first non-electric actor 66 is in the open state, the game balls do not come into contact with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 and the first special starter 57 has two pieces. When the game ball enters, it is closed. That is, for example, after the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state, one game ball enters the first special start port 57, and thereafter, the game ball enters the first non-electric player operation mechanism 70. In the case of contact, the first non-electric player 66 when two game balls enter the first special start port 57 without the game ball coming into contact with the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 from that time. Is closed.

  Similarly, the second special start port 58 is provided with a second non-electric accessory (non-electric accessory) 67. The second non-electric player 67 is configured to be openable and closable. When the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state, the second non-electric player 67 constitutes a state in which a game ball easily enters the second special start port 58 and is in a closed state. In this case, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special start port 58 than in the open state.

  In addition, although it abbreviate | omits also regarding description of the specific structure of the 2nd non-electric actor 67, the 2nd non-electric actor 67 is mechanically connected with the 2nd non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 mentioned later. When the game ball contacts (enters) the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 (by the weight of the game ball), the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 is released. And the 2nd non-electric player 67 will be in a closed state when a predetermined number of game balls (two in this embodiment) enter into the 2nd special starting port 58. FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, after the second non-electric actor 67 is in the open state, the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 does not come into contact with the game ball and the second special start port 58 has two pieces. When the game ball enters, it is closed. That is, for example, after the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state, one game ball enters the second special start port 58, and thereafter, the game ball enters the second non-electric player operation mechanism 71. In the case of contact, the second non-electric player 67 when two game balls enter the second special start port 58 without the game ball coming into contact with the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 from that time point. Is closed.

  The first non-electric role 66 and the second non-electric role 67 are roles that are not electrically driven and controlled, and correspond to a so-called second-type non-electric role. However, the second type non-electrical accessory here is one that opens or expands the entrance of a prize opening other than the grand prize opening, and the game ball wins a specific prize opening other than the prize opening, or It means something that operates when it passes a specific gate.

  The variable ordinary winning device 59 is disposed on the center right side of the game board 43 as viewed from the front, and includes a normal winning opening 59a that leads to the back side of the gaming board 43, and a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate (electrically driven) that covers the normal winning opening 59a. An accessory) 59b, and a variable ordinary winning device driving portion 59c (see FIG. 11) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 59b to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate 59b as an axis. .

  The normal winning opening 59a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. When the main control device 91, which will be described later, wins the normal symbol winning lottery, the variable normal winning device driving unit 59c is driven, and the opening / closing plate 59b tilts downward on the front surface, so that the game ball enters the normal winning port 59a. An open state that makes it easy to enter the ball is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated.

  Although specifically described later, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability support mode in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the opening / closing plate 59b is likely to be in an open state, and the opening / closing is higher than in the high frequency support mode. A low frequency support mode in which the plate 59b is unlikely to be in an open state is installed. In the high frequency support mode, as will be described later, it is advantageous that the player hits the game ball rightward.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the variable ordinary winning device 59 includes a partition member (distributing means, inner distributing means) 59d that divides the space in the normal winning opening 59a. In addition, it is communicated with a left discharge passage (first discharge passage) 68 and a right discharge passage (second discharge passage) 69 through which game balls that have entered the normal winning opening 59a are discharged.

  In the left discharge passage 68, the first non-electric actor operation that brings the first non-electric actor 66 into an open state by contact with the game ball (the game ball enters) (the first condition is satisfied). A mechanism (first operation trigger means) 70 is disposed, and the second discharge role is obtained when the right discharge passage 69 comes into contact with the game ball (the game ball enters) (the second condition is satisfied). A second non-electric actor actuating mechanism (second actuating means) 71 for disposing the article 67 is disposed. Therefore, when a game ball enters the normal winning opening 59a, the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69, whereby the first non-electric player 66 or the second non-electric player 67. Either of these is opened.

  The left discharge passage 68 has a left discharge passage detection sensor (first main detection means) 68a that detects a game ball passing through the left discharge passage 68 on the downstream side of the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70. Is arranged. In other words, the left discharge passage 68 is provided with a left discharge passage detection sensor 68a that detects a game ball that enters the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a and is discharged from the left discharge passage 68. In other words, the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a also has a function as a normal winning opening detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning opening 59a.

  In the right discharge passage 69, a right discharge passage detection sensor (second main detection means) 69 a that detects a game ball passing through the right discharge passage 69 is arranged downstream of the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71. It is installed. In other words, the right discharge passage 69 is provided with a right discharge passage detection sensor 69a that detects a game ball that enters the right space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a and is discharged from the right discharge passage 69. That is, the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a also has a function as a normal winning opening detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning opening 59a.

  In this embodiment, the partition member 59d divides the space in the normal winning opening 59a into a left side space (first space) K1 on the left side in front view (first space) K1 and a right side space (second space) K2 on the right side in front view in front view. As shown in the figure, it is fixedly provided in the regular winning opening 59a. The left discharge passage 68 communicates with the normal winning port 59a so as to discharge the game ball that has entered the left space K1 among the game balls that have entered the normal winning port 59a. The game balls that have entered the right space K2 out of the game balls that have entered the normal winning opening 59a are communicated with the normal winning opening 59a.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 59b (ordinary winning opening 59a) is in the open state, the player selects the space for entering the game ball into the ordinary winning opening 59a, thereby entering the ordinary winning opening 59a. It is possible to select whether the entered game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69. That is, when the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68, the game ball comes into contact with the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 and the first non-electric player 66 is opened, and the game is released from the right discharge passage 69. As the ball is discharged, the game ball comes into contact with the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 and the second non-electric player 67 is opened, so that the player enters the normal winning opening 59a. By selecting the space, it is possible to select whether the first non-electric actor 66 is opened or the second non-electric actor 67 is opened.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5, when the player hits the game ball to the right, the area until the player reaches the variable normal winning device 59 (above the variable normal winning device 59) is the area of the game ball. A partitioning mechanism (partitioning means) 72 that partitions along the traveling direction (downflow direction) is disposed. Specifically, when the player hits the game ball to the right, the partitioning mechanism 72 has an inner region (first region) R1 on the inner rail 53 side that guides the game ball to the left space K1 side in the normal winning opening 59a. In the normal winning opening 59a, an outer region (second region) R2 on the outer rail 54 side for guiding the game ball is arranged on the right space K2 side so as to partition. That is, when the opening / closing plate 59b is in the open state, the player can cause the game ball to enter the left space K1 by firing the game ball aiming at the inner region R1 located in front of the normal winning opening 59a. The game ball can be made to enter the right space K2 by firing the game ball aiming at the outer region R2 located in front of the normal winning opening 59a. That is, the player can select whether the game ball is to be entered into the left space K1 or the right space K2 by selectively aiming at a region located in front of the normal winning opening 59a. . In the present embodiment, the partition mechanism 72 is configured by the frame member 73 and the nail 51 made of a resin material or the like. However, the partition mechanism 72 may be configured by only the frame member 73 or only by the nail 51. It may be made of other members.

  In the present embodiment, the entrance of the inner region R1 (the opening on the side opposite to the normal winning opening 59a side in the inner region R1 and the portion through which the game ball first passes in the inner region R1) is the outer region R2. The opening width is longer (widened) than the entrance (the opening on the side opposite to the normal winning opening 59a side in the outer region R2 and the portion where the game ball first passes in the outer region R2). Here, when the player hits the game ball to the right, the player can allow the game ball to pass through the outer region R2 by maximizing the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31. Further, the player can cause the game ball to pass through the inner region R1 by slightly reducing the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 from the maximum state. In other words, the player can allow the game ball to pass through the inner region R1 by finely adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 so as not to maximize it.

  In this case, it is easier for the player to maximize the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 than to decrease the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 from the maximum state. That is, when the player hits the game ball to the right, it is easier for the player to pass the game ball through the outer region R2 than through the inner region R1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening width of the inlet of the inner region R1 is longer (widened) than the opening width of the inlet of the outer region R2. That is, it is easy to allow the game ball to pass through the inner region R1. For this reason, it can suppress passing a game ball to the area | region which a player does not intend.

  The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 61 is located at the center right side of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and is located below the variable normal winning device 59 and above the first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58. It is installed. In the present embodiment, two normal symbol start gates 61 are provided, and are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction in front view. Specifically, one of the two normal symbol start gates 61 is provided so that the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the inner region R1 does not enter the normal winning opening 59a, The other of the two normal symbol start gates 61 is provided so that the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the outer region R2 does not enter the normal winning opening 59a.

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 61, the corresponding detection sensor 61a (see FIG. 11) detects the passage (entrance) of the game ball, and the detection result is output to the main controller 91 described later. Is done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 61, the main controller 91 described later determines whether or not the normal symbol is hit (determination whether or not the opening / closing plate 59b is opened). If the determination result is a win (winning result corresponding to the shift to the open / close plate open state), the variable normal winning device driving unit 59c (see FIG. 11) is driven to open the open / close plate 59b. Thus, the game ball can easily enter the normal winning opening 59a.

  Further, when the normal winning opening 59a is in the closed state on the right side of the game board 43 when viewed from the front and below the variable ordinary winning device 59, the game ball that has passed through the inner region R1 is guided to the first special starting opening 57. The nail 51 is disposed so that the game ball that has passed through the outer region R2 is guided to the second special starting port 58. The arrangement of the nail 51 will be described in more detail. The nail 51 is the first when the first non-electric player 66 is in the open state when the game ball that has passed through the inner region R1 is guided to the first special start port 57. It is arranged so that it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the first special start port 57 and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special start port 57 when the first non-electric player 66 is in a closed state. Yes. Further, when the game ball that has passed through the outer region R2 is guided to the second special start port 58, the nail 51 is moved to the second special start port 58 when the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state. The game ball is arranged so that it is difficult to enter the second special start port 58 when the second non-electric player 67 is in the closed state.

  Here, the flow path of the game ball when the player strikes the game ball to the right will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of the game ball when the player hits the game ball to the right.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the player strikes the game ball to the right, the game ball passes through either the inner region R1 or the outer region R2. When the game ball passes through the inner region R1, when the open / close plate 59b is in an open state, the game ball enters the normal winning opening 59a as indicated by an arrow A1. At this time, since the game ball enters the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a, the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 and comes into contact with the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70. For this reason, the 1st non-electric player 66 will be in an open state. Further, when the opening / closing plate 59b is not in the open state, as shown by the arrow A2, the first special start port 57 does not enter the normal winning opening 59a but the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 61 as indicated by the arrow A2. Be guided to. At this time, when the first non-electric player 66 is in the open state, the game ball enters the first special start port 57, and when the first non-electric player 66 is not in the open state. The game ball does not enter the first special start port 57 and flows down as it is.

  When the game ball passes through the outer region R2, if the open / close plate 59b is in an open state, the game ball enters the normal winning port 59a as indicated by an arrow B1. At this time, since the game ball enters the right space K2, the game ball is discharged from the right discharge passage 69 and comes into contact with the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71. For this reason, the 2nd non-electric player 67 will be in an open state. When the opening / closing plate 59b is not in the open state, as shown by the arrow B2, the game ball does not enter the normal winning opening 59a but passes through the normal symbol starting gate 61 and then the second special starting opening 58. Be guided to. At this time, when the second non-electric player 67 is in the open state, the game ball enters the second special start port 58, and when the second non-electric player 67 is not in the open state. The game ball does not enter the second special start port 58 and flows down as it is.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the player wants to enter the first special start port 57 with the first non-electric player 66 in the open state, the player places the game ball so as to pass through the inner region R1. Just keep firing. Similarly, when the player wants to enter the second special start port 58 with the second non-electric player 67 in an open state, he / she continues to fire the game ball so as to pass through the outer region R2. Good. That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player launches a game ball aiming at either the inner region R1 or the outer region R2, thereby causing the player to enter the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58. A game ball can be entered by his / her choice.

  Returning to the description of the configuration of the game board 43, as shown in FIG. 5, the variable prize winning device 60 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 43 in the front view and below the first special start port 57. A large winning opening 60a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 60b covering the large winning opening 60a, and an opening / closing drive of the opening / closing plate 60b on the lower side of the opening / closing plate 60b. And a variable prize-winning device driving unit 60d (see FIG. 11) such as a solenoid for the purpose. The special winning opening 60a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. And when it determines with having shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (privilege game mode) by the main control apparatus 91 mentioned later (winning lottery was won), the variable big prize winning device drive part 60d is driven and the opening / closing plate 60b. Tilts downward on the front surface, temporarily forms an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter the big prize opening 60a, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state. For example, the special winning opening 60a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are entered). The opening / closing operation of the variable prize winning device 60 is determined according to the determined winning type. For example, if the result is a 15R winning result, which will be described later, it is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of the privilege game mode that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). A payout is made. For this reason, during the opening / closing execution mode, the player hits the game ball to the right and launches the game ball so as to enter the big prize opening 60a.

  The opening / closing execution mode refers to a lottery game (first lottery game) triggered by entering the first starting port 56 or entering the first special starting port 57 in the main controller 91 described later, or This is the mode to be entered when the lottery for whether or not to enter the open / close execution mode of the lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by entering the second special start port 58 is won. The mode will be described later. Further, during the opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult to win a normal symbol winning lottery, and the opening / closing plate 59b is unlikely to be in an open state. For this reason, when the player hits the game ball to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter any of the normal winning port 59a, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58, and it flows down as it is. You are guided to the big prize opening 60a.

  A plurality of general winning openings 55 are provided below the game board 43 in a front view. In addition, an out port 74 is provided at the bottom of the front view of the game board 43, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 74. .

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. In this specification, the general winning port 55, the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port 58, the variable ordinary winning device 59 (ordinary winning port 59a), and the variable large winning device. Entering a game ball into 60 (large winning opening 60a) is also expressed as winning.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, an adhering space 75 for adhering a certificate or an identification label is provided, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhering space 75 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the 14 window portions 21.

  Further, a main display section 76 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided at the lower left corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front (outside the outer rail 54). The main display portion 76 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14.

  The main display unit 76 is a first result display unit (first result display) indicating a result of the first lottery game performed in the main control device 91 based on winning to the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57. Means) 76a, a second result display section (second result display means) 76b indicating the result of the second lottery game performed in the main controller 91 based on the winning at the second special start port 58, and the opening / closing execution mode. When the variable prize winning device 60 enters the opening / closing execution mode by winning a lottery (winning lottery) for determining whether or not to shift, the variable prize winning device 60 in the opening / closing execution mode is selected. And a round display portion 76c indicating the number of times that is opened.

  Specifically, in the first result display section 76a, the variable display regarding the first lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), the change display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. When the lottery result of the first lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 76a and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section 76b, the variable display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. Thereafter, as a result of stopping the variable display, the display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. When the lottery result of the second lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 76b and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to either the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58), the corresponding first and second results. The period from when the variable display is started on the display units 76a and 76b until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped corresponds to one game time (variable display time). However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed as one game time. To do.

  Further, the main display unit 76 includes a display unit 76d in addition to the first and second result display units 76a and 76b and the round display unit 76c. In the other display portion 76d, for example, a variable display is performed in response to a winning at the normal symbol starting gate 61, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the normal symbol starting gate 61 is performed. Results are shown. If the result of the internal lottery triggered by winning the normal symbol starting gate 61 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the open / close plate open state, a predetermined stop result is lit on the other display section 76d. After being displayed, the state shifts to the open / close plate open state. In the open / close plate open state, the open / close plate 59b is in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the normal winning opening 59a. That is, in the open / closed plate open state, the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69 after the game ball has won the normal winning opening 59a, so that the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 or the first The game balls come into contact with any one of the two non-electric actor operating mechanisms 71, and the first non-electric actor 66 or the second non-electric actor 67 is opened.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 61 while the variable display triggered by the winning to the normal symbol start gate 61 is being performed in the other display portion 76d, the number of passages is a maximum of four in this embodiment. The number of hold times is also displayed. Furthermore, a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, or the second special starting port 58 while the variable display is performed on the first result display unit 76a or the second result display unit 76b. Then, in this embodiment, the number of winnings is held up to a maximum of 4 times in total for the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57, and up to 4 times for the second special start port 58, and the number of times that the winning is held. Is also displayed.

  The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 76 are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the pachinko machine 10 includes fewer LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. Various gaming states can be suggested. Further, the main display unit 76 may be configured using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

  The variable display device unit 62 is disposed in the center of the game board 43. The variable display unit 62 displays the lottery result of the first lottery game by variably displaying the first special symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in the first result display portion 76a, and also varies in the second result display portion 76b. The symbol display device (pattern display means) 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by variably displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and the symbol display device 80 are arranged to surround the symbol display device 80. And a center frame 81.

  The center frame 81 is installed with the upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. . Further, since the symbol display device 80 is disposed in the center of the game board 43 and the center frame 81 is extended forward, the game ball launched by the player is stored in the symbol display device 80. It flows down through the left side in front view or the right side in front view of the symbol display device 80.

  The symbol display device 80 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 17 inches and a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 8, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by winning the first starting port 56 or the first special starting port 57, and the second special starting port 58. The upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game triggered by winning the prize and the holding symbol (the first lottery game and the second lottery game on hold) are displayed. And a lower display area Dn on the side.

  In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by a display control device 93 described later. The symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is displayed variably as the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started with a winning at the first start port 56, the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58. That is, when the variable display is performed on the first result display unit 76a or the second result display unit 76b, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 accordingly. Then, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

  The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine kinds of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” shown in FIGS. And a sub-pattern composed of a shell-shaped picture pattern shown in FIG. 9 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of symbols in which numbers “1” to “9” are attached to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper, middle, and lower tiers. A symbol and a sub-symbol are arranged cyclically in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the changing direction of the symbols), and between the main symbols. The sub-design is arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of variation of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between the main symbols. It is arranged one by one.

  That is, each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of symbol variation), and then the main symbol of “9” is arranged. The main symbol “4” is additionally arranged between the main symbols “1” and “1”, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  In the upper display area Dm, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

  Then, in the case where an effect for game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm with a winning at the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58, The variable display is started so that the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same numbers attached to any of the active lines is formed, and the opening / closing execution mode The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

  As described above, the symbol display device 80 (the first result display unit 76a or the first result display portion 76a or the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58 is triggered by any winning. The variation display is started in the second result display portion 76b), and the period from when the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game time. In addition, the design of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Furthermore, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 80 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 9. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side when viewed from the front, a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side when viewed from the front, and the first reserved symbol display area Ds and the second reserved symbol. An execution suspension symbol display area Du is provided between the display area Dt and the display area Dt. The first holding symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holdings (the number of holdings of the first lottery game) triggered by winning at the first starting port 56 or the first special starting port 57. This pachinko machine 10 In the first start port 56 or the first special start port 57, a total of four winnings are put on hold, so the four first small display areas Ds1 to Ds4 It is divided into equal parts. The second reserved symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of holdings (the number of holdings of the second lottery game) triggered by winning a prize at the second special starting port 58. In the pachinko machine 10, the second special starting is performed. Since the winning prize to the mouth 58 is configured to be suspended up to four times, it is equally divided into first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of four small areas. The execution holding symbol display area Du is an area for displaying a holding symbol corresponding to the game times variably displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  Then, in the upper display area Dm, when a game ball wins at the first starting opening 56 or the first special starting opening 57 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the first lottery game triggered by the winning is made. The display area of the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the lower display area Dn (center side) In the display area), the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed. Similarly, when a game ball wins the second special start port 58 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower display area Dn In the second reserved symbol display area Dt, the second lottery game is displayed in the display area having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 where the reserved symbol is not displayed (the display area on the center side). The reserved symbol is displayed.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 10. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), there is a main control device 91 that controls the main game, and a voice lamp control device that controls voice and lamp display. 92 and a display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

  Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box connecting portion as a connecting means). And the board | substrate box is connected by these box coupling | bond parts so that separation | separation is impossible, and when the internal space of a board | substrate box is open | released, it has the structure which needs the destruction of the said board | substrate box, or partial excision. For example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided in the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but the box base and the box can be inserted by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion. The cover is connected to the cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. And when opening the board box in the event of a failure of the accommodated control board or inspecting the control board, etc., the connection part between the box joint part where the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint part The connecting portion between the box coupling portion and the box body is cut. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, a locking claw may be inserted into the long hole of another box coupling portion. If a history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it can be easily found whether or not an illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box.

  In addition, a plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting bases of the control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is combined with the.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering the unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the sticking location, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  3 and FIG. 10, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 91, the display controller 93, and the sound lamp controller 92. Yes. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 94 having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 95 and a control device assembly unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

  The payout mechanism 95 includes a tank 97 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 97 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 98 and a payout device 99 for paying out balls with a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 99a (see FIG. 11). The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 are discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. Note that a vibrator (not shown) for applying vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. The payout mechanism unit 95 is mounted with a back pack substrate that is supplied with, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply and is provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the control device assembly unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99, various control devices, and the like. And a power supply control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 31. The payout control device 100 and the power supply / launch control device 101 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and launch control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. Yes. The state return switch 102 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 11). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  The payout control device 100, the power source and the launch control device 101 are configured such that a control board or the like is housed in a board box as in the case of each control apparatus described above, and the same fraud prevention means as described above is provided. . In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at the upper corner portion on the rotating shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 97 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

  Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine. Each control device (each control board), which will be described in detail later, is an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and random number generation used in various lotteries. And a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 11 to 13 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 11 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 12 mainly shows the configuration of the main controller 91, and FIG. The structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 92 and the display control apparatus 93 is shown. In FIG. 11, a supply line for operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 is indicated by a double-line arrow, and other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid-line arrows. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and a ROM 113 and a RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. Hereinafter, the MPU 112, the ROM 113, and the RAM 114 of the main controller 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

  The main ROM 113 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, a special symbol admission table storage area 113a, a distribution table Storage area 113b, reach table storage area 113c, variable display time table storage area 113d, stop result table storage area 113e, time reduction mode count storage area 113f, normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113g, special figure special power address table storage area 113h, It has a general-purpose / electric power address table storage area 113i, an update data table storage area 113j, and a command information storage area 113k.

  The main-side RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage and retention, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. The main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 includes, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electricity counter area 114d, a special symbol special electricity timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, short-time mode flag storage area 114g, first short-time mode number counter area 114h, second short-time mode number counter area 114i, total short-time mode number counter area 114j, general-purpose ordinary power counter area 114k, ordinary-purpose ordinary power timer counter area 114m, various hit result flag storage areas 114n, other various counter areas 114p, and other various flag storage areas 114q.

  In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a single-chip configuration including the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114. The main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. A configuration may be adopted. The same applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

  The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown). Note that an input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the input port and the output port may be switched as necessary. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main side MPU 112, and various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a, 115, and various drives. The parts 59c and 60d and the main display part 76 are connected. First, the connection configuration of the various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a, 115, the various drive units 59c, 60d, and the main display unit 76 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

  On the input side of the main MPU 112, a game area general winning port 55, a first starting port 56, a first special starting port 57, a second special starting port 58, a variable ordinary winning device 59, a variable big winning device 60, and Winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a provided for the normal symbol start gate 61 (hereinafter collectively these winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c) , 61a, 68a, 69a) are electrically connected through electric wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and each winning detection sensor 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a may be connected to each other through one electric wiring, A configuration in which a relay board is interposed in the middle may be employed. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a through the winning ICs 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and based on the reception results, Make a winning decision (pick-up decision) to the winning part. In addition, the main MPU 112 receives the first lottery game triggered by winning a prize at the first starting port 56 or winning a prize at the first special starting port 57, and a second when triggered by a prize at the second special starting port 58. A lottery game is executed, and an open / close plate open lottery (support lottery) is executed based on a ball entering (passing) the normal symbol start gate 61.

  The winning IC 116 is a path abnormality confirmation means or a path abnormality confirmation circuit. The winning IC 116 is used to connect the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a and the main MPU 112. It is confirmed whether or not normal signal transmission is performed.

  In addition to the above winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a, other detection sensors such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the input side of the main MPU 112. 115 is electrically connected via electric wiring. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred. judge.

  On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable normal winning device driving unit 59c that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 59b of the variable ordinary winning device 59, and a variable big winning device driving unit that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 60b of the variable winning device 60. 60d is electrically connected via electrical wiring. The main display unit 76 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electric wiring. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits. Through the driver circuit, the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the variable ordinary winning device driving unit 59c and the variable prize winning device driving unit 60d and the main display unit. The display control 76 is executed.

  For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable prize winning device driving unit 60d is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the prize winning opening 60a is opened and closed. In addition, when the normal symbol winning lottery is won (when the main condition is satisfied), the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the variable ordinary winning device driving unit 59c so that the open / close plate 59b is opened and closed. The Further, in each game round, display control of the main display unit 76 (first and second result display units 76a and 76b) is executed in the main MPU 112. When the lottery result indicating whether or not to open / close the opening / closing plate 59b is shown, display control of the main display unit 76 (other display unit 76d) is executed in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 sets information according to the progress of the game in the main RAM 114. Although omitted in FIG. 11, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 performs a signal according to the information set in the main RAM 114. Setting for output is performed on the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

  Next, a configuration in connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before describing the configuration of these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The payout control apparatus 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout apparatus 99. The payout control board 121 includes an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 includes a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. . Hereinafter, the MPU 122, the ROM 123, and the RAM 124 provided in the payout control apparatus 100 are referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123, and the payout side RAM 124.

  The payout-side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the payout side MPU 122 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout-side ROM 123. The payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123. In addition, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to the above-described elements.

  The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game balls supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 are prevented from passing downstream so as not to flow downstream and a state in which the game balls are sent downstream. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stopper member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting game balls sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring. Has been. The payout-side MPU 122 supplies a driving signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute payout of the game ball, and pays based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Know the number of game balls completed.

  Further, the payout-side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 provided in the back pack unit 15 via electric wiring, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 is connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 via electric wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. Thereby, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10 as appropriate. The payout-side MPU 122 executes control of rental balls by transmitting and receiving electrical signals to and from the card unit.

  Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball receiving tray. In addition, a no-sphere detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the tank 97 is in a no-sphere state is electrically connected.

  Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

  For details on the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms winning in the winning portion corresponding to the generation of the winning ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 68a, and 69a. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted to the payout MPU 122, and a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

  There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113k of the main ROM 113 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 55 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 60 is specified, 15 is received. When a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output and a winning to the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port 58, or the variable ordinary winning device 59 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in performing communication of the prize ball command, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication. That is, the information of multiple bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

  In addition, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating the completion of the prize ball and the number of the prize balls completed, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the game ball payout, An abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been released is included. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. The predetermined abnormality related to the game ball payout includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a no-ball state of the tank 97.

  In communication of the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, a plurality of bits of information included in the payout status command are sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

  The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout MPU 122 toward the main MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112 so that the main MPU 112 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

  The payout permission signal is composed of 1-bit information, and a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and an HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. The However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the prize ball command output is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is outputted when the prize ball command output is permitted. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The third signal path SL3 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

  As described above, the command communication between the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is not the parallel communication but the serial communication, so that the electric wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is assumed. Even if an illegal act using a so-called hanging board to connect an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden in the electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to receive a large amount of gaming balls illegally, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned unauthorized board becomes It becomes easy to hide by electric wiring. On the other hand, when the command communication is performed by serial communication, the illegal board is not easily hidden in the electric wiring, and it is easy to find it when the board is temporarily installed.

  Next, a configuration in electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

  The power supply and launch control apparatus 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control apparatus 91 and the payout control apparatus 100. A power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 143 and a power-off power supply unit 144.

  The power-on power supply unit 143 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, etc. The operation voltage required for each is generated, and the generated operation voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 143 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15 and + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V and + 5V voltages are supplied to the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the main controller 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 143 and the main-side MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 143. Then, when this voltage is less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the main MPU 112 is set to correspond to the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. . The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

  The power supply unit 144 for power interruption includes a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off), the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power interruption. As a result, storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storing and holding is supplied from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption.

  Note that the capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). . The configuration of the power interruption power supply unit 144 is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 144 for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption. In the power supply and launch control board 141, even after the DC stable power supply of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing. The system is configured to maintain an output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source of the system, at a normal value. Thus, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  Here, the configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122 will be described.

  The power from the power-on power supply unit 143 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCC terminal of the payout MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from the commercial power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held in the RAMs 114 and 124. Is called.

  On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112 but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout MPU 122. That is, the power for storing and holding power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores information, but the payout RAM 124 does not store information. Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  As described above, the storage holding power from the power interruption time power supply unit 144 is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout side RAM 124, thereby reducing the capacity of the power interruption time power supply unit 144. Is planned. Thereby, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 responsible for launch control of game balls. The firing control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies a condition, a receiving circuit 147 that is permitted to fire, and a launching IC 148.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal having a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player and a game even when the handle portion is being rotated. A stop switch 31b which is manually operated by the player to stop the ball firing is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121 and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal board 131.

  The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 31a, and receives a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated from the stop switch 31b. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  The firing permission receiving circuit 147 permits the HI level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112 on the condition that the HI level condition satisfying signal is transmitted from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the launch IC 148 when the launch permission signal is received. The main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when it does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 146. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main side MPU 112 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and when reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is completed, The transmission permission signal is terminated.

  When the launch IC 148 receives the launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is connected to each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feeder 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function of outputting a drive signal periodically. In this case, launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the firing solenoid 47 so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the firing rail 45.

  Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the launch IC 148 is based on a voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. For this reason, the greater the amount of operation of the operation handle 31, the stronger the launch strength of the game ball by the launch solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

  Next, a configuration in electrical connection between the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sound lamp control device 92 includes a sound lamp control board 151. The sound lamp control board 151 includes an MPU 152. The MPU 152 includes a ROM 153 and a RAM 154. Hereinafter, the MPU 152, the ROM 153, and the RAM 154 provided in the audio lamp control device 92 will be described as the audio side MPU 152, the audio side ROM 153, and the audio side RAM 154.

  The voice-side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The voice-side ROM 153 stores various control programs executed by the voice-side MPU 152 and fixed value data, and includes various data table storage areas 153a, command information storage areas 153b, and the like.

  The various data table storage area 153a is an area in which light emission data, audio data, and the like are stored. The command information storage area 153b is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice-side MPU 152 is stored.

  The voice-side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for readout is faster than that of the voice ROM 153. The voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 includes, for example, a command storage area 154a, a retained data area 154b, a game mode flag storage area 154c, various counter areas 154d, and the like.

  The command storage area 154a is an area for storing a command received from the main MPU 112. The retained data area 154b is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, as well as to notify the voice side MPU 152 even after the effects and notifications are started. This is an area for storing and holding data that can be used independently. The game mode flag storage area 154c is an area in which a flag corresponding to the staying mode is stored. The various counter areas 154d are areas in which a game number counter and the like are stored.

  Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (a variation command, a type command, a fixed stop command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, etc. described later) The contents of the performance to be executed in the above are determined. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to perform the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 and the sound output device 156 is controlled to perform the sound control of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do.

  A first frame button detection sensor 26 a that detects the operation of the first frame button 26 and a second frame button detection sensor 27 a that detects the operation of the second frame button 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. ing. Then, the audio side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated. When the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do.

  Further, the voice side MPU 152 specifies whether or not notification is necessary based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs the light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and the voice control of the voice output device 156. Notification.

  Various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later. These various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113k of the main ROM 113. The various commands are configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

  The audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93 and transmits various commands including the contents of effects determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. Note that various commands output from the voice-side MPU 152 are referred to the command information storage area 153 b of the voice-side ROM 153. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 91 without going through the sound lamp control device 92, and the sound lamp control device in relation to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the communication direction from 92.

  The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, and an MPU 162 is mounted on the display control board 161, and a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 are built in the MPU 162. The display control board 161 includes a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. Hereinafter, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display-side MPU 162.

  The program ROM 163 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs executed by the display side MPU 162 and fixed value data. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when a command to the VDP 165 is transmitted, and each effect It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

  The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. The work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

  The display-side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the audio lamp control device 92 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 165). To implement.

  The VDP 165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP 165 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 165 should be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads out image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167 in accordance with the image data. The displayed image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  The character ROM 166 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The character ROM 166 also has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80 as part of the data. Is set in the image data storage area for holding 166a.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 is stored in the character ROM 166.

  The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 167.

  The video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a has first to fourth units so as to correspond to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. The reserved symbol display area 167a has a first to fourth unit so as to correspond to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Furthermore, an execution unit area RG is set in the reserved symbol display area 167a so as to correspond to the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. In the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. The When no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG (when blank data is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that commands are exchanged between the audio-side MPU 152 and the display-side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected using a first signal line group 170, and display is performed from the sound side MPU 152 using the first signal line group 170. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies a signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 172 for a clock signal to be transmitted, and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the audio side MPU 152 using the second signal line group 180. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A clock signal signal line 182 for identifying and at least a latch signal signal line 182 for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command are included. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are integrated, and a connector in which the other ends are integrated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. The other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

  The communication method between the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like.

  In the game, the main MPU 112 uses various counter information to determine whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode (privilege game mode) (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a winning lottery), and display settings on the main display unit 76. The symbol display setting of the symbol display device 80 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, a winning random number counter C1 used for winning lottery, and a winning type counter used for determining the type of opening / closing execution mode (winning type) when winning the winning lottery C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 80 moves out and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the hit random number counter C1, a main display unit 76 and a symbol display The variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the device 80, the electric accessory (opening / closing plate) opening random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the opening / closing plate 59b is opened, and the electric accessory opening random number counter A random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of C4 is used. A part of each counter is updated at an interval of 4 msec which is an execution interval of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in a main process (see FIG. 18) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. The predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58 is held in the special symbol in the main RAM 114. A predetermined numerical value stored in the ball storage area 114b and stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 61 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. The The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114p of the main RAM 114.

  Here, the configuration of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c will be described.

  The special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b has eight reserved areas of the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and one execution area RA9. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first reserved area RA1. The configurations of the second to eighth reserved areas RA2 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 have a winning random number counter storage area 201, a winning type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and a winning start opening storage. An area 204 is included. In the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8, the winning random number counter C1 is matched with the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, and the second special starting port 58. Each value of the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203. Information regarding which of the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58 is a winning is stored in the winning start port storage area 204. In the present embodiment, when winning information for the first starting port is stored in the winning starting port storage area 204, information for distinguishing between the first starting port 56 and the first special starting port 57 is not stored. If a winning game ball is continuously generated alternately for the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, and the second special start port 58, the first hold area RA1 → second hold Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of area RA2, third reserved area RA3, fourth reserved area RA4, fifth reserved area RA5, sixth reserved area RA6, seventh reserved area RA7, eighth reserved area RA8. To go. Thus, by providing eight holding areas, a total of up to eight winning histories of gaming balls as a whole can be obtained at the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, and the second special starting port 58. It is designed to be stored (holding storage).

  Note that a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57 are stored. In addition, a maximum of four game balls winning histories at the second special start port 58 are stored. That is, a maximum of four winning histories are stored, so that a maximum of eight winning histories are stored as a whole. Further, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and three prize balls (in this embodiment, three game balls). Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the number that can be reserved and stored is described as eight, but the number that can be stored and stored is not limited to eight and is arbitrary, and other numbers such as six, seven, and nine or more are available. It may be a plurality. Further, the total number of the first start ports 56 and the first special start ports 57 that can be reserved and stored and the number of the second special start ports 58 that can be stored and stored may be different.

  The execution area RA9 is an area for moving each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 when starting the variable display of the main display unit 76 (the first result display unit 76a or the second result display unit 76b). At the start of one game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area R9.

  In addition, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, the number of the first lottery game held (the number of the variable display hold triggered by winning at the first start port 56 or the first special start port 57) is stored. Special symbol holding number storage area NA, second lottery game holding number (second special symbol holding number storage area NB for storing the number of holdings of variable display on the occasion of winning the second special start port 58) A total number-of-holds storage area NX for storing the total number of variable displays is provided.

  The first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is an area for storing the number of game balls that have been won and held at the first starting port 56 or the first special starting port 57, and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NA. The area NB is a storage area for storing the number of game balls that have been placed in the second special start port 58 and held. The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the total number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the value of the electric-equipment release random number counter C4 (the value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) is matched to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 61. Is a reserved area for storing chronologically.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas, an execution area RB5 and a reserved number storage area NC, of the first to fourth reservation areas RB1 to RB4. The four storage areas of the first to fourth reservation areas RB1 to RB4 store (hold storage) up to four game ball winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 61.

  Specifically, when winnings to the normal symbol start gate 61 occur continuously, the electric parts are released in the order of the first reserved area RB1 → second reserved area RB2 → third reserved area RB3 → fourth reserved area RB4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in time series. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 61 are stored.

  The execution area RB5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first reservation area RB1. Then, when performing the open lottery of the opening / closing plate 59b, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RB5.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the number that can be reserved is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, five or more. Or may be singular.

  Returning to the description of the counter, the various counters will be specifically described.

  For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and counting starts again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58. Stored in

  The random number value that is won in the winning lottery is stored as a special symbol success / failure table storage area 113a as a success / failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113 as a special symbol success / failure table (a success / failure information group in the grant information). Here, the contents of the special symbol success / failure table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special symbol success / failure table in the present embodiment, where (a) shows the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol success / failure for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the special symbol success / failure table includes a special symbol success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) for FIG. 16 (a) and a high probability mode for FIG. 16 (b). Special symbol success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in this embodiment, the low probability mode (low probability correspondence state) and the high probability mode (high probability correspondence state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), a random value ( That is, the winning information is 6 pieces. In other words, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to, the probability of winning the lottery at 1/100 is set. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, the winning lottery) Information) is 7 pieces. That is, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to, the probability of winning the winning lottery is about 1/86. In the present embodiment, the value group (7, 67, 241, 307, 423, 557) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the situation of the low probability mode is set in the situation of the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is won in the winning lottery. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58. Stored.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the assigned information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as a distribution information group storage unit in the main ROM 113. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the distribution table. In the present embodiment, the distribution table of FIG. 17 is referred to regardless of any winnings to the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58.

  In the distribution table of the present embodiment, “0-7” of the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0-29” is set as the 15 normal hit result A as the game result distribution result, and “8-15” ”Is the result B per 15R,“ 16-23 ”is the result C per 15R,“ 24-27 ”is the result D per 15R normal, and“ 28, 29 ”is the result per 15R probability variation. ing.

  The probability change winning result in the present embodiment is a winning result when the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The normal winning result is a winning result when the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintains) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode in the normal winning result is terminated when the number of games (the number of times the lottery game is executed) reaches the number of times after the transition, and the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the state where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is also referred to as a time reduction mode (restricted high frequency support mode).

  Here, the “high probability mode” means a state in which the probability of winning the subsequent winning lottery as an added value after winning is increased, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, the opening / closing execution mode. It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to (privilege game). “Low probability mode” means when the mode is not a high probability mode (when it is not probable), and the probability of winning a lottery is normal, that is, the probability of winning a lottery is lower than when the probability is changed It is.

  The “high frequency support mode” is a state in which the frequency with which the open / close plate 59b is opened per unit time is high. The “low frequency support mode” refers to a case where the mode is not the high frequency support mode, and is a state where the frequency with which the opening / closing plate 59b is opened per unit time is low. That is, in the present embodiment, the frequency of the opening / closing plate 59b being in an open state per unit time when compared with the support mode in a situation where the game balls are continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide mode) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

  In the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have different probabilities that the open / close plate open state win in the open / close plate open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4 is different. There is a higher probability that the open / close plate open state will be won than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the open / close plate open state is selected, the high frequency support mode is set more frequently than the low frequency support mode when the open / close plate 59b is open when the open / close plate open state is selected. Furthermore, the opening time of one time is set longer. In this case, when the open / close plate is opened in the high frequency support mode and the open / close plate 59b is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state Is set shorter than one opening time.

  For this reason, in the high-frequency support mode, the open / close plate 59b is in an open state, so that it becomes easy for a game ball to win a normal winning opening 59a. When the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68, the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state, and the game ball can easily win the first special start port 57. Similarly, when the game ball is discharged from the right discharge passage 69, the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state, so that the game ball can easily win the second special start port 58. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it is advantageous for the player to play the game while the ball is hit to the right while keeping the number of possession balls less.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is opened / closed per unit time in the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the open-plate open lottery The probability of winning the open / close plate open state may be made equal, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be set as appropriate, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Returning to the description of the distribution table (FIG. 16), in this embodiment, when the results are 15R normal hit results A to D, end conditions A to C for ending the high frequency support mode are set, respectively. In the present embodiment, the end condition A is defined by the number of times the first lottery game is executed (first number of times), and the end condition B is defined by the number of times the second lottery game is executed (second number of times). The end condition C is defined by the sum (total number) of the number of times the first lottery game is executed and the number of times the second lottery game is executed.

  Specifically, when the hit type counter C2 is “0 to 7” and the 15R normal hit result A, 50 times is set as the end condition A, 50 times is set as the end condition B, and 100 times is set as the end condition C. Is set. That is, in the case of the 15R normal hit result A, the frequency of the high-frequency support mode is between 50 and 100 times. That is, assuming that the probability of winning the lottery during the short-time mode (so-called consecutive probability) is the continuation rate, the probability of winning the lottery during the low-probability mode is set to 1/100. Between 5% and 63.4%.

  When the hit type counter C2 is “8 to 15” and the 15R normal hit result B, the end condition A is set to 20 times, the end condition B is set to 100 times, and the end condition C is set to 100 times. . That is, in the case of 15R normal hit result B, the frequency of the high frequency support mode is any of 20 to 100 times, and the continuation rate is approximately 18.2% to 63.4%.

  When the hit type counter C2 is “16 to 23” and the 15R normal hit result C, the end condition A is set to 100 times, the end condition B is set to 20 times, and the end condition C is set to 100 times. . That is, in the case of 15R normal hit result C, the frequency of the high-frequency support mode is any of 20 to 100 times, and the continuation rate is approximately 18.2% to 63.4%.

  When the hit type counter C2 is “24 to 27” and the 15R normal hit result D, 100 times is set as the end condition A, 100 times is set as the end condition B, and 100 times is set as the end condition C. . That is, in the case of the 15R normal hit result D, the frequency of the high-frequency support mode is fixed at 100 times, and the continuation rate is about 63.4%.

  In the following, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the result 15 A per normal 15R, the subsequent high-frequency support mode is also referred to as the time reduction mode A. Similarly, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R normal hit result B, the subsequent high-frequency support mode is also referred to as a time reduction mode B. When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the result 15C per normal 15R, the subsequent high-frequency support mode is also referred to as the time reduction mode C. When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a result 15D per normal hit, the subsequent high-frequency support mode is also referred to as a time reduction mode D. Further, the number of end conditions of the 15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, and 15R normal hit result D are stored in the time reduction mode number storage area 113f of the main ROM 113, respectively.

  In the control of the variable prize winning device 60 in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game with an upper limit of a predetermined number of times is executed. The round game is continued until either one of the conditions for a predetermined opening duration elapses or for a predetermined upper limit number of game balls to win the big winning opening 60a is satisfied. It is a game. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit number is set to 10.

  In the present embodiment, in a situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. In this case, in each round game, an opening continuation time longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the maximum number of winning game balls in one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game is generated for the big winning opening 60a.

  Here, the various winning results described with reference to FIG. 17 will be described. The “15R probability variation winning result and 15R normal winning result” are game results in which the special winning opening 60a is opened 15 times.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58. Stored in Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode (game times won in the winning lottery), the main MPU 112 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and a stop display after the variable display in the game times that are the opening / closing execution mode of the variable prize device 60. In a gaming machine in which the result is a special display result, the special display result is likely to be obtained before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making a player think that it is a variable display state.

  Specifically, the reach display means that a winning occurs by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 (open / close execution mode). Is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may have a winning symbol combination corresponding to the is there.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed. .

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 8, in the pachinko machine 10, the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3. , A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbol having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the middle symbol row Z2 ( Reach display is achieved by performing symbol variation display in the final stop symbol sequence. When the open / close execution mode occurs, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed in such a manner that the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The change display of is terminated.

  In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, and the change of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen 80a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS includes a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 76 (first result display unit 76a or second result display unit 76b) and a symbol variation display time (display duration time) in the symbol display device 80. ) In the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when a variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display on the main display unit 76 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 80. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. .

  The electric accessory opening random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory opening random number counter C4, and the count is started again from the initial value. Be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory release random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 61.

  The random number value for winning the normal symbol is stored as a normal symbol success / failure table (availability information group) in the normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113g as the success / failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers to be won for the normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is “5 to 28”. In the high probability mode, the range is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the low probability mode, it is determined that the winning is achieved when the value of the acquired electric machine article opening random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric machine object opening random number counter is determined. When the value of C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is made. A predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display portion 76d in the main display portion 76, and the opening / closing plate 59b is opened.

<Various processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, a main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the main controller 91 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by a reset at power-on.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait process, a wait process (for example, a peripheral control device such as the audio lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) becomes ready to operate. 1 sec) and waits without proceeding to the next process. After the elapse of the power-on wait process, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). Then, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). If it is determined that the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 is set to “1” (S105: YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (S106). It is determined whether or not the checksum stored at the time of blocking matches, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

  If it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), a power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and the current gaming state (a state before power-off when the power-off is normal) Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92 in accordance with the current gaming state. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 103 is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to “1” (S105: NO), or when the checksum is not normal. In the case where the main side RAM 114 is initialized (S108: NO), the main side RAM 114 is cleared (S108), and then the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to S108. Similarly, when the occurrence information of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step 108 in the same manner.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 103 has not been pressed, step 108 is executed without executing step 108, provided that the power failure flag is set to “1” and that the checksum is normal. 109 is executed. In other words, if the power supply is normally shut off and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the power-off gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the following residual process. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute a timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) described later, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the following remaining processes are repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following remaining processes are non-periodic processes executed irregularly.

  In the remaining processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 114, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the processes of step 110 to step 113 are executed.

  Here, as described above, since the random number initial value update process and the variation counter update process are set in the remaining process so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt disable process and the interrupt enable process, the timer interrupt process The timing of starting is always immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is only necessary to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt process is unambiguous. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt process, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of predetermined data in the main side MPU 112, the main data stored at that time in the register of the main side MPU 112 at the start of the timer interrupt processing. There is no need to execute save processing to the side RAM 114, and similarly, there is no need to execute data return processing to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt process is also reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or during the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing does not initiate these timer interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main MPU 112 (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

  First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, it exists in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts the timer interrupt process with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 first executes a power failure information storage process (S201). In this power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 117, and when a power outage is identified, a predetermined power outage process is executed.

  Next, a lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main processing (FIG. 18) (S203), and variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main processing (FIG. 18) ( S204). Next, a game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 11) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not an act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by fraud detection processing (S212), which will be described later. Based on the detection result of the sensor, it is determined whether or not an unauthorized radio wave is output toward the pachinko machine 10, and an unauthorized vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. It is determined whether or not there is any. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these fraud determinations, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped, assuming that a specific event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and when it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. The process is executed (S207). In the notification command output process, a notification command is set as an output target in a situation where any specific event has occurred and a notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

  Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the notification command corresponding to the content of the specific event is set to be executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is started. By starting the supply of the operating power while manually operating the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 after the stop, it is prevented from being executed along with the initialization of the main RAM 114. Become.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the output process corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when information for switching the special winning opening 60a to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the variable prize winning device driving unit 60d is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the open / close plate 59b to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable ordinary winning device driving unit 59c is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops outputting the drive signal. Further, in the non-electric actor state grasping process (S218) described later, commands related to the first non-electric actor 66 or the second non-electric actor 67 (non-electric actor release command, non-electric actor closure command) are set. If so, the command is output to the sound lamp controller 92. In addition, a command set as an output target in each process is output to the sound lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

  Next, a reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Subsequently, the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the first special starting opening 57, the second special starting opening 58, the variable ordinary winning apparatus 59, the variable large winning apparatus 60, and the ordinary symbol starting gate 61 are awarded. The signals received from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a to be detected are read, and the general winning port 55, the first starting port 56, the first special starting port 57, the second special starting port are read. A winning detection process for specifying whether or not there is a winning at the start opening 58, the variable ordinary winning device 59, the variable large winning device 60, and the normal symbol starting gate 61 is executed (S210).

  Thereafter, timer update processing for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is collected and handled. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if an affirmative decision is made as to whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, an affirmative decision is made at step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Set for stop. As a result, an affirmative determination is made at step 206. Note that the predetermined event is, as described in step 205, whether or not an act of bringing a magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and an unauthorized radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not an improper vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, in a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the operation handle 31, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec. Based on the information read in the reading process in step 209, the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a are checked for disconnection, the gaming machine main body 12, and the front door frame 14 An input state monitoring process for performing release confirmation or the like is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each winning detection sensor 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, 69a is confirmed, or when the gaming machine body 12 is confirmed to be opened, As in step 207, notification command output processing is executed. In the notification command output process, the notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 60c, 61a, 68a, and 69a are disconnected, or the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. A notification command indicating this is transmitted. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If such a determination is made and an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, a corresponding notification command is set as an output target.

  Next, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times (variable display times) and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and opening / closing control of the opening / closing plate (electrical accessory) 59b is performed. A normal power transmission control process is executed (S216). The special map special power control process in step 215 and the general map special power control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

  Subsequently, on the basis of the processing results of the immediately preceding step 215 and step 216, the hold information for the winning at the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58 (first and second special start ports 58). In order to reflect on the main display section 76 (other display section 76d) the increase / decrease number of the symbol holding number storage areas NA, NB) and the increase / decrease number of the holding information (holding number storage area NC) for winning the normal symbol start gate 61. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed (S217). Further, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, display control for reflecting the number of times that the variable prize winning device 60 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode on the round display unit 76c based on a round setting process described later. Processing (setting of output information) is performed. Furthermore, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (extinguishing) the display of the round display section 76c is performed.

  Thereafter, a non-electric player state grasping process is executed (S218). Here, the non-electric player state grasping process will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the non-electric player state grasping process.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the non-electric player state grasping process, first, whether or not a game ball has passed through the left discharge passage 68 (whether or not a game ball has been won in the left space K1 of the normal winning port 59a). ) Is determined (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the left discharge passage 68 (S301: NO), whether or not the game ball has passed through the right discharge passage 69 (the winning of the game ball in the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a). (S302).

  Note that the determination in step 301 is made based on the detection result of the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a, and the determination in step 302 is made based on the detection result of the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a. In addition, the fact that the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a detects that the game ball has passed means that the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism 70 is disposed in the left discharge passage 68. A game ball comes into contact with (enters into) the electric component actuating mechanism 70 and the first non-electric component 66 is in an open state (maintained in an open state), and two game balls are placed in the first special start port 57. It means that you are ready to win. Similarly, the fact that the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a detects that the game ball has passed means that the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 is disposed in the right discharge passage 69. A game ball comes into contact with (enters into) the non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 and the second non-electric actor 67 enters an open state (maintained in an open state). This means that the game ball is ready for winning.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the left discharge passage 68 (S301: YES), 2 is set in the first start winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S303), and the first non-electric role An object release command is set as an output target (S304). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the right discharge passage 69 (S302: YES), 2 is set in the second start winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S305). The release command is set as an output target (S306).

  After setting the first non-electric actor release command to the output target, after setting the second non-electric actor release command to the output target, or when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right discharge passage 69 (S302: NO), as shown in FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won at the first special start port 57 (S401). If it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first special start port 57 (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the first start win counter is 0 (S402). When it is determined that the value of the first start prize counter is not 0 (S402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the first start prize counter is 1 or 2, the value of the first start prize counter is decremented by 1. (S403).

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the value of the first start winning counter is 0 (S404). If it is determined that the first starting winning counter is 0 (S404: YES), the first non-electric player is closed. The command is set as an output target (S405). That is, as described above, when the first non-electric player 66 of the present embodiment is in an open state, the game balls do not come into contact with the first non-electric player operation mechanism 70 thereafter, and two game balls However, it is set as the structure which will be in a closed state by winning in the 1st special starting port 57. FIG. Then, when the game ball wins the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a and the first non-electric player 66 becomes open (maintained in the open state), in step 303, the first start winning counter is set. The value is set to 2. For this reason, when the game ball wins the first special start port 57 and the value of the first start winning counter becomes 0, it means that the first non-electric player 66 is closed. Accordingly, in step 405, the first non-electric actor closing command is set as an output target.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 402 that the first start winning counter is 0 (S402: YES), a setting process for game stop is executed (S406), and the first non-electrical object abnormality release command is output. (S407).

  That is, as described above, the first non-electric player 66 enters an open state when the game ball wins the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a and comes into contact with the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70, and thereafter In addition, the game balls are not brought into contact with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, and the two game balls enter the first special start port 57 to be closed. Then, when the game ball wins the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a (the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state), the value of the first start winning counter is set to 2 in step 303. . Further, in the present embodiment, the first special start port 57 is arranged so that a game ball can win the first special start port 57 when the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state. . For this reason, when a game ball wins the first special start port 57, the case where the game ball wins the first special start port 57 even though the value of the first start win counter is 0 is the first non- When an abnormality has occurred in the mechanical configuration of the electric character 66 and the first non-electric character operating mechanism 70, or the first non-electric character 66 is in an abnormally open state by an unauthorized means from the outside. is assumed. Therefore, the game stop setting process is executed, and the first non-electric actor abnormality release command is set as an output target. Thereby, an affirmative determination is made in step 206, and in step 207, the first non-electric actor abnormality release command is output to the voice-side MPU 152.

  After setting the first non-electric player close command or when it is determined in step 404 that the first start winning counter is not 0 (S404: NO), the non-electric player state grasping process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step 401 that there is no game ball winning in the first special start opening 57 (S401: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a game ball winning in the second special start opening 58. (S408), the same processing as in steps 401 to 407 is executed.

  That is, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second special start port 58 (S408: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the second start win counter is 0 (S409). When it is determined that the value of the second start prize counter is not 0 (S409: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the second start prize counter is 1 or 2, the value of the second start prize counter is decremented by 1. (S410).

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the value of the second start winning counter is 0 (S411). If it is determined that the second starting winning counter is 0 (S411: YES), the second non-electric player is closed. The command is set as an output target (S412). That is, as described above, when the second non-electric player 67 of the present embodiment is in an open state, the game balls do not contact the second non-electric player operation mechanism 71 thereafter, and two game balls Is configured to be closed by winning the second special start opening 58. Then, when the game ball wins the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a and the second non-electric player 67 becomes open (maintained in the open state), the second start winning counter of the second start winning counter is set in step 305. The value is set to 2. For this reason, when the game ball wins the second special start opening 58, the value of the second start winning counter becomes 0 means that the second non-electric player 67 is closed. Therefore, in step 412, the second non-electric actor closing command is set as an output target.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 409 that the second start winning counter is 0 (S409: YES), the game stop setting process is executed (S413), and the second non-electric player abnormality release command is output. (S414).

  In other words, as described above, the second non-electric player 67 enters an open state when the game ball wins the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a and comes into contact with the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71, and thereafter In addition, the game balls are not brought into contact with the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71, and the two game balls enter the second special start port 58 to be closed. Then, when the game ball wins the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a (the second non-electric player 67 becomes open), the value of the second start winning counter is set to 2 in step 305. . Further, in the present embodiment, the second special start port 58 is arranged so that a game ball can win a prize at the second special start port 58 when the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state. . For this reason, when a game ball wins the second special start port 58, the game ball wins the second special start port 58 even though the value of the second start win counter is 0. When an abnormality occurs in the mechanical configuration of the electric character 67 or the second non-electric character operating mechanism 71, or the second non-electric character 67 is in an abnormally open state by an unauthorized means from the outside. is assumed. Therefore, the game stop setting process is executed, and the second non-electric actor abnormality release command is set as an output target. Thereby, an affirmative determination is made in step 206, and in step 207, the second non-electric actor abnormality release command is output to the voice-side MPU 152.

  After setting the second non-electric player closing command, if it is determined in step 411 that the second start winning counter is not 0 (S411: NO), or the game ball wins to the second special starting port 58 If it is determined that there is not (S408: NO), the non-electrical component state grasping process is terminated as it is.

  Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display (S218). The demonstration display process will be specifically described later.

  Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout-side MPU 122 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

  Next, the state of the signal output to the external output terminal board 104 is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. External information setting processing is executed (S221).

  After the external process information setting process in step 221 is completed, or after the notification command output process in step 207 is completed, an interrupt end declaration is set (S222). In the main MPU 112, once timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the timer interrupt processing. Next, interrupt permission is set (S223). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt prohibition state is set. Therefore, in step 223, an interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure special power control process of step 215 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when winning to the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58 is generated, a process for acquiring the hold information is executed, When the hold information is stored, whether or not the hold information is determined is determined, and further, a process for performing an effect for game play is executed with the determination of the correctness. Further, based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the game has been performed, a process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for the game is executed, and a process during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed (S501). Here, the hold information acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process.

  The holding information acquisition process determines whether a game ball has won the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58, and the first start port 56, the first special start port 57. Or, when a game ball is won at the second special start port 58, the upper limit number of reserves (a total of four at the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57 and a maximum of four at the second special start port 58). This is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b up to a total of eight). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, the determination result of the success / failure, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is processing to do.

  First, it is determined from the detection results of the winning detection sensors 56a and 57a whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the first start opening 56 or the first special start opening 57 (S601). Then, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 56 or the first special start opening 57 (there is a start winning) (S601: YES), the hold stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA. The value of the number Na is read out, and it is determined whether or not the acquired reservation number Na is less than 4 (S602). That is, it is determined whether the number of reserves for the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57 is less than 4 (that is, the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit value).

  If it is determined that the acquired reserved number Na is less than four (S602: YES), the reserved number Na in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is incremented by 1 and the total reserved number storage area NX. Is read, and the total holding number Nx is incremented by 1 (S603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired hold number Na is 4 (S602: NO), the acquisition process of the hold information is terminated as it is.

  After the process of step 603 is completed, numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the first start Reservation area corresponding to the number of reservations Na obtained by adding 1 in step 603 in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area RA, information indicating that a winning to the mouth 56 or the first special start opening 57 is triggered (S604).

  Thereafter, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 recognize that a winning at the first start port 56 or the first special start port 57 has occurred, and a hold command is a process for executing a hold notification. A setting process is executed (S605).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start port 56 or the first special start port 57 (S601: NO), the game ball has won the second special start port 58 (start win). Is determined based on the detection result of the winning detection sensor 58a (S606). Then, if it is determined that the game ball has won the second special start opening 58 (the start win has been received) (S606: YES), the same processing as in steps 602 to 605 is performed (S607 to S610). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second special start port 58 (S606: NO), the acquisition process of the hold information is ended as it is.

  In addition, since the process of step 607-step 610 differs only in the process with respect to each process from step 602-step 605 having won the 2nd special start opening 58, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In step 607, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read and determined. In step 608, the reserved number Nb in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is incremented by one. 1 is added to the total reserved number Nx of the total reserved number storage area NX, and in step 609, numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3 and winning to the second special start port 58 are triggered. The information is stored in the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number Nb obtained by adding 1 in step 608 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB.

  The above is the hold information acquisition process. Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), after executing the holding information acquisition process in step 501, the special figure special electric counter information is obtained from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. A reading process is executed (S502). Also, a process of reading the special figure special power address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 is executed (S503), and a start address corresponding to the special figure special electric counter information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. Processing is executed (S504).

  As described above, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process (S507) that is a process for starting effects for game times and a process for advancing effects for game times. A figure changing process (S508) and a special figure finalizing process (S509) which is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set. In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, special electricity start processing (S510) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and during special electricity opening which is processing for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 60a. Control the process (S511), the special electric power closing process (S512) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 60a, and the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Special electric power ending process (S513), which is a process for this purpose, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  The special figure special power address table will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”. Start address information ("SA0" to "SA6") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determining process, the start address SA3 is the program start address for executing the special electricity start process, and the start address SA4 is executing the special electricity release process The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end process. .

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to know which process is to be executed as the special figure special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, an effect for game times is started when no other effect for game times is executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode. In the process related to the production, before starting the production for the game times, it is confirmed whether the flag indicating that the production for the game times is being executed and whether the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. It is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that is set. In addition, during the execution of the game-turn effect, a flag indicating that the flag indicating that the game-turn effect is being executed is set and a confirmation display is set. It is necessary to check whether or not

  In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and another opening / closing execution mode is not executed. In the process, before starting the opening / closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for playing the game has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it is being performed. Further, when the opening is being performed, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the special winning opening 60a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not. Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

  On the other hand, if a special figure special electricity counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  In the following, using the special figure special electricity counter and the special figure special electricity address table, the special figure fluctuation start process (S507), the special figure fluctuation process (S508), the special figure finalizing process (S509), and the special electricity start process (S510). ), A special power open process (S511), a special power close process (S512), and a special power end process (S513) will be described.

  First, after obtaining the start address in step 504, a process for setting a zero flag is executed (S505). In the setting process to the zero flag, the numeric information of the special figure special timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is based on the read numeric information. Set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, “1” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “ If it is not “0”, “0” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is not “0” and the zero flag is “1”, the zero flag is changed from “1” to “0”. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter used to specify the update timing of the special figure special electric power counter according to the passage of time in the main MPU 112, and the timer in step 211 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 19). Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the update process.

  Subsequently, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 504 is executed (S506). Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process (S507), and if the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process (S508). If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process (S509). If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process (S510), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process (S511). If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process (S512). If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to special electric power end processing (S513). And when the process of step 507-step 513 is performed, this special figure special electric control process is complete | finished. Below, each process of step 507-step 513 is demonstrated separately.

  First, the special figure variation start process in step 507 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is stored, and a process for starting the game times in which the variable display is performed in the main display unit 76 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

  First, the value of the total reserved number Nx is read from the total reserved number storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired reserved number Nx is 1 or more (S701). If it is determined that the total number of holds Nx is 0 (S701: NO), the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number Nx is 1 or more (S701: YES), a data setting process is executed (S702).

  In the data setting process, first, a process of subtracting 1 from the total number of holds Nx and shifting data stored in the first hold area RA1 (that is, hold information) to the execution area RA9 is executed. Thereafter, a process of shifting data (that is, holding information) stored in each holding area RA2 to RA8 is executed. That is, this data setting process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RA1 and the second Reserved area RA2 → first reserved area RA1, third reserved area RA3 → second reserved area RA2, fourth reserved area RA4 → third reserved area RA3, fifth reserved area RA5 → fourth reserved area RA4, sixth reserved The data in each area is shifted, such as area RA6 → fifth reserved area RA5, seventh reserved area RA7 → sixth reserved area RA6, eighth reserved area RA8 → seventh reserved area RA7. That is, in the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process (S702), which will be described later, is executed in the order of the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the hold areas RA1 to RA8. Further, in this data setting process, a shift time command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of the holding areas RA1 to RA8 has been shifted is set as an output target.

  In this process, the winning start information in the holding information shifted to the execution area RA9 is grasped, and the holding number Na in the first special symbol holding ball storage area NA or the holding number in the second special symbol holding ball storage area NB. Subtract 1 from Nb.

  After executing the data setting process in step 702, a win / fail determination process (special information determination process), which is a winning lottery, is executed (S703). In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. judge. If it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 16 (b)) stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not it is correct, that is, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. If it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table (FIG. 16 (a)) for the low probability mode stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not it is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the low probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. The high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode due to the probability variation hit result (FIG. 31, S1303), and then erased at the end of the opening / closing execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 31, S1304).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning / winning result (S704). When it is determined that the winning result is a win (S704: YES), a distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S705). In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area RC, that is, numerical information related to the hit type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202) is grasped. . Then, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 ascertained (the numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, it is specified which of the following results corresponds to the result A per 15R normal result, the result B per 15R normal result, the result C per 15R normal result, the result D per 15R normal result, or the result per 15R probability variation.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (S706). Specifically, information on the pattern (lighted state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 76 in the game round related to the start of the change is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop result table for the hit results is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for winning results, information on the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 76 is set differently for each hit result type.

  Next, a flag storing process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S707). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning result specified in step 705 among the various winning result flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. In the present embodiment, in the various hit result flag storage area 114n, the hourly hit result flag A is stored in the case of 15R normal hit result A, and in the case of 15R normal hit result B, the hourly hit result flag B is stored. When the result is 15R normal hit result C, the time reduction result flag C is stored. When the result is 15R normal hit result D, the time reduction result flag D is stored. When the result is 15R probability change result, Stores the probability variation result flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning result is not the result (S704: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (S708). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 76 in the game round relating to the start of the current change is for the detachment result stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop information table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the winning result.

  After executing any one of the processes in Step 707 and Step 708, a grasping process (display mode determining process) of the variable display time (display continuation period) is performed (S709). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a reach display occurs in the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a winning result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Moreover, although it is not any hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (the numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach. In this case, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that the reach display is generated, the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is corresponded with reference to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113. The variable display time information obtained is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

  The normal reach in the present embodiment is a reach with a short variation display time, and after the reach line is formed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is ( This is a so-called fluctuation of bitterness (see FIG. 8 for the symbol sequence). Super reach is a reach that has a variable display time longer than normal reach and suggests that the player has a high expectation that a hit result will occur at the game time. For example, it is displayed after normal reach. Is done. In the present embodiment, when the current game round is a winning result, the probability of selecting a super reach is higher than when the winning result is not a winning result.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the current change type counter CS is set. Fluctuating display time information corresponding to numerical information is acquired.

  Note that the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table. In the present embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx is larger. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is performed so that the short variable display time is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. The time is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the variable display time does not vary according to the total number of reservations Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the hit results, the case of out-reach, and the case of non-reach out-of-reach (complete out). In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

  Next, the variable display time information acquired in step 709 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter in the special figure special electricity timer counter area 114e (S710). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process (S211) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 19). In addition, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 76 and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 80 are performed. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a state where a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the confirmation is displayed (final stop display) over a fixed time (final stop time). In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 709 is a time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the variable display time can also be rephrased as a time before confirmation (time before final stop).

  Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S711). Note that the change command includes information on the change display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. For this reason, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, determines the reach from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is possible to specify the presence or absence of occurrence. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the type of reach. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred, and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, information on whether the result is 15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, 15R normal hit result D, or 15R probability change hit result A as game result information. Is included. Note that the change command and the type command set as output targets in step 711 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, by the port output processing (S208) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19). Is done.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode flag is stored in the time reduction mode flag storage area 114g (S712). If it is determined that the time reduction mode flag is stored (S712: YES), the winning start port The information stored in the storage area 204 is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current game round is triggered by the winning of a game ball at the first start opening 56 or the first special start opening 57. (S713). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game time is based on the execution of the first lottery game. If it is determined that the game is based on the execution of the first lottery game (S713: YES), the first short time mode number counter stored in the first short time mode number counter area 114h and the total short time mode number counter are stored. The value of the total time reduction mode number counter stored in the area 114j is decremented by 1 (S714). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game time is not based on the execution of the first lottery game (S713: NO), that is, when it is determined that the current game time is based on the execution of the second lottery game. Then, 1 is subtracted from the values of the second short time mode number counter stored in the second short time mode number counter area 114i and the total short time mode number counter stored in the total short time mode number counter area 114j (S715). Note that the time reduction mode count counter has passed the ending time in the opening / closing execution mode due to any of the hit results of 15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, or 15R normal hit result D. A specified number of times is set later (FIG. 31, S1306).

  After step 714 or step 715 decrements the predetermined time reduction mode number counter by 1 or when it is determined that the time reduction mode flag is not stored (S712: NO), the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 76 is started. (S716), the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (S717). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the processing of step 717 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric electricity counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure changing process in step 508 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process. The special figure changing process is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current game round effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 ( S801). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the variation display time in the current game stage effect is It means that it has passed.

  If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the main display unit 76 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so the update timing of the main display unit 76 (light emission pattern update) It is determined whether or not (timing) (S802). If it is determined that it is not the update timing (S802: NO), the special figure variation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the update timing (S802: YES), update content read processing is executed (S803). As for this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113j of the main ROM 113.

  Next, update processing for setting the update content read in step 803 for update of the main display unit 76 is executed (S804). The process for actually updating the display contents of the main display unit 76 is executed in the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S801: YES), a fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as an output target (S805). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game round effect.

  Then, the stop result reading process is executed (S806). In the reading process, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed set in the main RAM 114 in step 706 or step 708 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 25) at the start of the current game round is read. Thereafter, an update process for setting the read pattern mode information for updating the main display unit 76 is executed (S807).

  Subsequently, information of a fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the fixed time information is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter (S808). Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S809). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is “1”. Therefore, when the processing of step 809 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”. " Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure finalizing process in step 509 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”.

  First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the current game stage effect has elapsed (S901). ). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “2” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the fixed time in the current game play effect has elapsed Means that If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S901: NO), the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the fixed time has elapsed (S901: YES), the determination of whether or not the game has been triggered this time is made by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114n in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode) (S902). In the various winning result flag storage area 114n, a flag corresponding to the winning result is stored in the flag storing process in step 707 when the winning lottery is won in the special figure change start process (FIG. 25).

  If it is determined that the winning combination is made (S902: YES), the opening command is set as an output target (S903). The opening command is a command for recognizing that the sound lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, starts the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the opening command includes the type of the hit result (15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, 15R normal hit result D, or 15R probability per hit change result) that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Information is also included.

  Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S904). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “3” when the processing of step 904 is executed. " Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning combination is not made (S902: NO), that is, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the game has been played this time is a losing result (that is, a result that does not trigger the opening / closing execution mode). In step S905, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode flag is stored in the time reduction mode flag storage area 114g. If it is determined that the short time mode flag is stored (S905: YES), the first short time mode number counter area 114h and the second short time mode number counter area 114i are stored in the first short time mode number counter area 114h. It is determined whether or not all of the second short time mode number counter and the total short time mode number counter stored in the total short time mode number counter area 114j are 1 or more (S906). When it is determined that it is not above (S906: NO), that is, when it is determined that at least one is 0, each hourly mode number counter is cleared to 0 (S907). Thereafter, the time reduction mode flag stored in the time reduction mode flag storage area 114g is deleted (S908), and the time reduction mode end command is set as an output target (S909). After setting the time-short mode end command to be output, if it is determined that the time-short mode flag is not stored in the time-short mode flag storage area 114g (S905: NO), or the first time-short mode count counter, the second time-short mode count When it is determined that the counter and the total time-saving mode number counter value are all 1 or more (S906: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (S910). Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity start process of step 710 in the special figure special electricity control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process. The special electricity start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1001). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 24), in step 705, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the opening time in this opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S1001: NO), this special electricity start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S1001: YES), a round setting process for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the winning result is performed (S1002). In the present embodiment, “10” is set as the upper limit number that is one end condition of the round game, and “15” is set in the round counter in the winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p of the main RAM 114. To do. The winning counter is a counter that is decremented by “1” every time a game ball is won into the big winning opening 60a. The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode, and one round is consumed in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode. Every time “1” is subtracted.

  After the round setting process in step 1002 is completed, information on the first duration for opening the special winning opening 60a corresponding to the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is read (S1003). In the present embodiment, the first opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read opening duration is set in the special figure special timer counter (S1004).

  Next, an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 60a is executed (S1005). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 60 a in the main MPU 112. Thereby, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the output of the drive signal to the variable prize winning device drive unit 60d is started to switch the prize winning opening 60a to the open state.

  Subsequently, after setting the release command as an output target (S1006), 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1007). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “3” when the special electric power start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 1007 is executed. Become. Thereafter, the special electricity start process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power release opening process of step 511 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special power release opening process. The special electricity release process is a process after the special electricity start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4”.

  First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the open duration in the current round game has passed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

  If it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1101: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1102). Subsequently, the closing time (for example, 1 sec) information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the closing time setting process is performed in which the closing time information is set in the special figure special timer counter (S1103). Then, a closing setting process for closing the special winning opening 60a is executed (S1104). In the closing setting process, “0” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 60a in the main MPU 112. Thereby, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the output of the drive signal to the variable prize winning device drive unit 60d is stopped to switch the prize winning opening 60a to the closed state.

  Then, after setting the closing command as an output target (S1105), 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1106). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the process of step 1106 is executed is “5”. Become. Thereafter, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening continuation time has not elapsed (S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the big winning opening 60a based on the detection result from the winning detection sensor 60c (S1107). ). If it is determined that there is no winning at the special winning opening 60a (S1107: NO), the special electric power releasing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize at the big prize opening 60a (S1107: YES), the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S1108). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is “0” (S1109), and when it is determined that it is “0” (S1109: YES), the processing after the above-mentioned steps 1102 to 1106 is executed. End the special electricity release process. On the other hand, when the winning counter is not “0” (S1109: NO), the special electric power release opening process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the special electric power closing process of step 512 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special electricity closing process. The special electricity closing process is a process after the special electricity release process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0” (S1201). If the round counter is not “0” (S1201: NO), whether or not the closing time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 It is determined whether or not (S1202). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the closing time has elapsed. When it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1202: NO), the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1202: YES), “10” is set to the winning counter (S1203). Subsequently, a reading process of the opening continuation time is executed (S1204). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n, the result of the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out, based on these The information on the duration for which the special winning opening 60a is opened is read out. In the present pachinko machine 10, all rounds in each hit result are set to have an open duration corresponding to the long-time mode. Then, the read information of the opening duration is set in the special figure special timer counter (S1205).

  Subsequently, an opening setting process is executed (S1206). The processing contents of the opening setting process are the same as the opening setting process of step 1005 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 28). Next, after setting the release command as an output target (S1207), the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1 (S1208). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 1208 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is “0” (S1201: YES), the ending command is set as an output target (S1209). The ending command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S1210). Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1211). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “6” when the process of S1211 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power end process of step 513 in the special graphic special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special electricity ending process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “6”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1301: NO), the special electricity ending process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1301: YES), the type of hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has ended this time is set to the various hit result flag storage area 114n of the main RAM 114. To determine whether or not the result is a probability change result (S1302). If it is determined that the result is a probability variation result (15R probability variation result) (S1302: YES), the high probability mode flag is not stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. The probability mode flag is stored (S1303). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit result that has caused the transition to the open / close execution mode that has been completed this time is not a positive hit result (15R normal hit result) (S1302: NO), the high probability mode flag is stored. If the high-probability mode flag is erased (S1304), the short-time mode flag is stored in the short-time mode flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (S1305). If the time reduction mode flag is already stored, it is maintained as it is.

  Then, based on the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114n in the first short time mode number counter, the second short time mode number counter, and the total short time mode number counter, the short time mode number storage area 113f of the main ROM 113 is used. , The number of time-saving modes is set (S1306). Specifically, if the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the hourly hit result flag A (if the 15R normal hit result A), “50” is set in the first hourly mode count counter. Then, “50” is set in the second time reduction mode number counter, and “100” is set in the total time reduction mode number counter (see FIG. 17, 15R normal hit result A). Further, when the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the hourly hit result flag B (when it is the 15R normal hit result B), “20” is set in the first hourly mode number counter. “100” is set in the 2 hour short mode number counter, and “100” is set in the total short time mode number counter (see FIG. 17, 15R normal hit result B). If the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the hourly hit result flag C (if the 15R normal hit result C), “100” is set in the first hourly mode count counter. “20” is set in the 2 hour short-time mode number counter, and “100” is set in the total short-time mode number counter (see FIG. 17, 15R normal hit result C). Furthermore, when the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the hourly hit result flag D (when 15R normal hit result D), “100” is set in the first hourly mode count counter. “100” is set in the 2 hour short-time mode number counter, and “100” is set in the total short-time mode number counter (see FIG. 17, 15R normal hit result D).

  Thereafter, the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n are erased (S1307), the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, and the special electricity termination process is terminated (S1308).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special power control process is executed using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter. For this reason, when the main MPU 112 identifies which situation is in a series of game flows composed of a game-playing effect and an opening / closing execution mode, a special figure special electric power counter may be referred to. Thus, there is no need to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, in each of the processes from step 507 to step 513, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for making a transition to the next situation after a certain situation is completed, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

  In addition, “0”, which is the initial value of the special figure special electricity counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of gaming situations composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, even after the initialization of the main RAM 114, etc., it is possible to be the first situation in the series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter.

  In addition, when updating the special figure special electricity counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  In addition, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above-described series of game situations is set separately from the processes in steps 507 to 513, and refer to the special figure special electricity counter. Are not included in each process executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the setting of the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information is simplified.

  Of the processes in steps 507 to 513, in a process in which a period is measured in order to determine an end condition of a corresponding situation, a common period measuring unit called a special figure special electricity timer counter is used. Measurement is performed. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situation corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter does not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referred to in a plurality of situations. In other words, the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

  Further, the process of updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) set as a process different from steps 507 to 513. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 507 to 513.

  Further, whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” is collectively determined at step 505 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 22), and step 508, step 509, step 511 to step 511 are executed. In each process of 513, the passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112. Thereby, in each process of step 508, step 509, step 511 to step 513, the numerical information is read from the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 114, and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is “0”. Compared with the case where it performs, simplification of a process structure is achieved.

  Here, the special figure special power counter is also referred to in order to confirm which state is in a series of games composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode in processes other than the special figure special electric control process. The For example, in the demonstration display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the special figure special power counter is referred to, and the demonstration display process will be described later.

  Next, the normal power control process executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary power transmission control process.

  When the normal symbol start gate 61 is won, the normal symbol / general power control process executes a process for acquiring the normal symbol hold information and the normal symbol hold information is stored. In addition, the opening / closing plate (electric accessory) 59b is determined to be opened for the hold information, and further, a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol is executed using the opening determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process for opening and closing the open / close plate 59b is executed.

  Specifically, first, the process for acquiring the normal symbol hold information is executed (S1401). In the acquisition process, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 61, the numerical information (that is, the normal symbol hold information) of the electric accessory release random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c. Execute the process. In addition, acquisition of the holding information of the normal symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of holding (four in this embodiment).

  Next, a process of reading the information of the general-purpose power counter from the general-purpose power counter area 114k of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1402), and the general-purpose power address table storage area 113i of the main-side ROM 113 is read. A process of reading information in the address table is executed (S1403). And the process which acquires the start address corresponding to the information of a general-purpose / electric power counter from a general-purpose / electric power address table is performed (S1404).

  The processing contents of steps 1402 to 1404 will be described. As described above, the ordinary map / electric power control process includes a process related to the effects for the ordinary map and a process related to the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 59b. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 59b, a process during opening of normal power and a process during closing of normal power are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

  Referring to FIG. 33, the general-purpose power-telephone address table can set numerical information of “0” to “4”. The start address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of numerical information of the ordinary power counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during normalization, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during open power, and the start address NSA4 is closed This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. One addition, one subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the processing executed in the electric control processing. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special power control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process is to be executed as the ordinary power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the normal map change process, the general map finalizing process, the general power open process, and the general power shut-off process using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  After executing the process of step 1404, the normal symbol zero flag setting process is executed (S1405). In the normal symbol zero flag setting process, the numeric information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the ordinary figure electric power timer counter area 114m, and the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter is “0”. ”, A process of setting“ 1 ”to a normal design zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed. In other words, when the numerical information of the ordinary map normal timer counter is not “0”, the process of setting “0” (erasing “1”) to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 Execute. The general-purpose normal power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the general-purpose normal power counter according to the passage of time. Step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the timer update process.

  Next, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1404 is executed (S1406). Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common map change start process (S1407), and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal map change process (S1408). When the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing for determining the usual figure (S1409), and when the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for opening the power system (S1410), and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the normal power supply closing process (S1411).

  In the normal symbol change start process (S1407), on the condition that the normal symbol hold information is stored, the normal symbol hold information is used to determine whether the opening / closing plate 59b is opened, and the main display unit 76 In the other display section 76d, a process of starting the display of the variation of the pattern (flashing display) is executed. Note that the open probability of the opening / closing plate 59b is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. Whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is determined based on whether or not the time reduction mode flag or the high probability mode flag is stored. Further, in the usual figure change start process, information on the variable display time for changing the display of the picture on the other display part 76d is set in the normal figure electric power timer counter, and the change display of the picture on the other display part 76d is started. In this case, the ordinary power counter is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the normal map changing process (S1408), a process for updating the display on the other display unit 76d is executed. In this case, on the condition that the change display time has been confirmed, the fixed time information is set in the normal-use normal power timer counter, and the normal-use normal power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  In the process of determining the general symbol (S1409), a process for displaying the result of the current release determination on the other display unit 76d for the normal symbol determination time is executed and the result of the release determination is a winning result. Then, a process for setting the opening / closing plate 59b to be opened and a process for setting the number of times of opening when the opening / closing plate 59b is opened in response to the current winning result are executed. In this case, on the condition that the regular symbol confirmation time has passed and the result of the release determination is the winning result, the information on the current opening duration time of the opening / closing plate 59b is stored in the general-purpose power timer counter. At the same time, the open / close plate 59b is opened, and the normal power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the fixed time of the normal symbol has elapsed but the result of the open determination is not the winning result, the setting for setting the open / close plate 59b to be in the open state is not performed, and the normal power counter is set to “0”. Execute the clearing process.

  In the process of opening the power train (S1410), the opening / closing plate 59b is maintained in the open state, and a process for closing the opening / closing plate 59b is executed when the closing timing is reached. In this case, on the condition that the opening duration of the opening / closing plate 59b has been confirmed, information on the closing duration of the opening / closing plate 59b is set in the normal power timer counter, and the opening / closing plate 59b is closed. In addition, the general-purpose power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  In the process of closing the power transmission (S1411), when the open / close plate 59b needs to be opened again while maintaining the closed state of the open / close plate 59b, a process for opening the open / close plate 59b is executed. . In this case, on the condition that it has been confirmed that the closing duration of the opening / closing plate 59b has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the opening / closing plate 59b, information on the current opening duration of the opening / closing plate 59b is usually provided. At the same time, the open / close plate 59b is set to the open state, and the common-use counter is updated from “4” to “3”. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the closing time of the opening / closing plate 59b has elapsed, but it is not necessary to open the opening / closing plate 59b again, the setting for making the opening / closing plate 59b open is not performed. A process of clearing the counter to “0” is executed.

  If any one of steps 1407 to 1411 is executed, the ordinary power transmission control process is terminated.

  As described above, the general map power control process is executed using the general map general power counter, the general map general power address table and the general map general power timer counter, so When the main MPU 112 identifies the situation in a series of game flows configured by opening and closing 59b, it is only necessary to refer to a general power counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the past. There is no need to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, when updating the ordinary power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. In addition, since the normal symbol zero flag is used in the same manner as the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control process, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Next, the demonstration display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a demonstration display process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “0” (S1501). The case where the special figure special electricity counter is “0” means that the game round effect has not been executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag that a game-playing effect is being executed as in the prior art, and the presence / absence of a flag is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag. It is necessary to read the flag information from the main RAM 114 and check the information, and then read the other flag information from the main RAM 114 to check the information. Then, it is necessary to perform address designation to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to perform data setting processing for the register when data is transferred to the main RAM 114 at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special power counter, the address designation to the main RAM 114 is only once, and further, the data setting processing to the register when data is transferred is only once. . Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  If it is determined that the special figure special power counter is not “0” (S1501: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special power counter is “0” (S1501). : YES), it is determined whether or not a demo display state is set (S1502).

  The demonstration display state means a state in which a demonstration display (that is, a standby display) has already been performed on the symbol display device 80, and the demonstration display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114q of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. Also, the demonstration display is a predetermined demonstration display waiting time (for example, after the ending time of the previous opening / closing execution mode has been completed after the final time has elapsed after displaying the result of stopping the previous game times) , 0.1 sec), an image of a start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and an effect corresponding to that is performed by the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34. Say.

  In the demonstration display in the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the active line performs a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol is a predetermined symbol. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying an image in operation.

  If it is determined that it is in the demo display state (S1502: YES), the present demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not in the demo display state (S1502: NO), it is in a demo display waiting state. It is determined whether or not (S1503). The demonstration display waiting state means a state where the measurement of the demonstration display waiting time has already been started, and is a state in which a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114q of the main RAM 114. is there.

  If it is determined that the display is not in the demo display waiting state (S1503: N0), the information on the demo display waiting time stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information on the demo display waiting time is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1504). Subsequently, a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114q of the main RAM 114 to set a demonstration display waiting state (S1505). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display is waiting for the demonstration display (S1503: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (S1506). If it is determined that the special figure special electricity timer counter is not "0" (S1506: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (S1506: YES), the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114q of the main RAM 114 to set the demo display state (S1507). ). In step 1507, the demo display wait flag is deleted to cancel the demo display wait state. The demonstration display state is canceled when the demonstration display flag is erased when an effect for game times is newly started. Next, a demonstration start command is set as an output target (S1508). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

<Direction and notification execution control>
Next, production control and notification execution control using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

  First, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at 4 msec, for example.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a main-side command storage process is executed (S1601), and a display-side command storage process is executed (S1602). The main-side command storage process in step 1601 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the voice-side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 112. The display-side command storage process in step 1602 is a display-side command storage process. When a command is received from the MPU 162, the command is stored in the command storage area 154a of the voice RAM 154. The command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area 154a. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  Next, a main-side command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 112 is executed (S1603), and a display-side command corresponding to performing a process corresponding to the command received from the display-side MPU 162 is performed. Processing is executed (S1604). In the display-side command handling process in step 1604, a specific description is omitted, but various commands are transmitted from the display-side MPU 162 at a predetermined timing during game play (FIG. 38, S1907). Perform the corresponding process. The main-side command handling process in step 1603 will be specifically described later.

  Subsequently, a frame button handling process is executed (S1605). In this frame button handling process, for example, a predetermined key of the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on condition that a demonstration start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game turn or opening / closing execution mode). If so, the volume and light amount corresponding to the operation are set for updating. In addition, when the demonstration start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game time and opening / closing execution mode), or when one game time is processed, the variation display of the game time is stopped. The first frame button 26 is provided on the condition that the notice effect (for example, the notice effect such as the conversation effect or the character effect) is not displayed until the predetermined period (for example, before the predetermined period when the reach display is performed). Is operated by the player, a stage change command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. Thereby, the display side MPU 162 changes and displays the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of “underwater stage” → “beach stage” → “town stage” → “underwater stage”. Furthermore, when the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the period in which the notice effect is displayed when one unit of game play is being processed, a notice response effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. To do. As a result, the display side MPU 162 displays a response effect corresponding to the notice effect on the display screen 80a, or displays a new character design, moving image, or the like. Whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated is determined by a signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26. Similarly, whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

  Next, while performing the light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various light emission parts including the electrical decoration part 33 (S1606), the audio | voice control process for performing the audio | voice control of the speaker part 34 is performed (S1607). It should be noted that the light emission control process and the voice control process are performed when information is set for updating in the frame button corresponding process in step 1605, a main command corresponding process (FIG. 37) described later, or a display side command corresponding process. It is executed based on the information. Subsequently, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the voice-side RAM 154 is executed (S1608).

  Next, the main-side command response processing in step 1603 in the timer interrupt processing of the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37 are flowcharts showing main-side command response processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 112 (S1701). If it is determined that these commands have been received (S1701: YES), game result storage processing is performed. Is executed (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round is specified from the fluctuation command, and whether or not reach occurs from the fluctuation display time, and normal reach when the reach occurs. Alternatively, a process of specifying the super-reach and writing the specified information in the retained data area 154b provided in the voice-side RAM 154 is executed. Further, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round, that is, the game of the current game round If the result is a winning result, or if it is a winning result (winning the winning lottery), information on which winning result is specified is specified, and the specified information is stored in a data area held in the voice RAM 154. A process of writing to 154b is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154b is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, and the notification, and after the effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data that can be independently used by the voice-side MPU 152.

  Next, a preliminary lottery process is executed (S1703). In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. As described above, as the notice display, as already described, in the situation where the symbol display is variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 80, or a part of the symbol display. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from symbols on symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the mode until then What makes a different predetermined aspect and what makes the symbol on symbol row Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then are also included. The notice display may occur at any game time when reach display is performed or when reach display is not performed. However, when reach display is performed, it is higher than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Also, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the winning results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  Next, stop symbol determination processing is executed (S1704). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is used as information on the stop result of this time. decide. In this case, the type of the same symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery or the like. In the present embodiment, when the same symbol combination is determined, in the case of the 15R probability variation result, it is determined that the combination of “7” symbols is established, and the 15R normal hit result A and the 15R normal hit result In the case of B, 15R normal hit result C, or 15R normal hit result D, it is determined so that a combination of symbols other than “7” symbols is established. That is, in this embodiment, when the combination of “7” symbols is displayed on the symbol display device 80, the player can recognize that the 15R probability change result has been won in the corresponding game times. On the other hand, if a combination of symbols other than “7” symbols is displayed on the symbol display device 80, the player can recognize that the 15R normal winning result is won in the corresponding game times, but the 15R normal winning result It is not possible to clearly recognize whether the winning result is A, 15R normal result B, 15R normal result C, or 15R normal result D. However, in this embodiment, even in the case of a 15R probability variation result, in this stop symbol determination process, a combination other than the “7” symbol may be established, and an opening handling process (S1713) described later is performed. Thus, the player may be notified that the result is a 15R probability variation result. Thus, the game can be continued while expecting the player to have a probable result even in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Then, the process for determining the production pattern of this game time is performed (S1705). In this process, information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, information on the variation display time, information on the game result identified in step 1702, and A combination of information on the lottery result of the notice lottery process in step 1703 and an effect pattern corresponding to the game mode in which the user is staying are selected.

  The game mode flag storage area 154c is referred to for the staying game mode, and the corresponding flag is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c in a game mode flag storage process (S1715) described later. If the short-time mode flag A is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, an effect (suggestion) pattern corresponding to the short-time mode A is selected, and if the short-time mode flag B is stored, it corresponds to the short-time mode B. If an effect (suggestion) pattern to be selected is selected, and if the time reduction mode flag C is stored, an effect (suggestion) pattern corresponding to the time reduction mode C is selected, and if the time reduction mode flag D is stored, it corresponds to the time reduction mode D. If the effect (implying) pattern to be selected is selected and the high probability mode flag is stored, the effect pattern corresponding to the high probability mode is selected. Thereby, the player can estimate the time-saving mode in which the player is staying during the time-saving mode. In the case of the time reduction mode A, the time reduction mode B, the time reduction mode C, or the time reduction mode D, as will be described later, when the time reduction mode end command is received (S1720: YES), the time reduction mode flag is cleared (S1721). . For this reason, when no flag is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, it is determined that the normal mode (the lottery mode related to the winning lottery is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode) and corresponds to the normal mode. A production pattern is selected.

  Next, a process of writing the type of stop symbol determined in step 1704 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 1705 to the retained data area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1706). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the current game time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154b, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time. Also, the audio side MPU 152 can read again. Further, the audio side MPU 152 can grasp again whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

  Subsequently, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 1704 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 1705 are transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1707). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving this command will be described later.

  Next, a game number updating process is executed (S1708). In this update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed so that 1 is added to the number of digested games measured in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 154d of the voice side RAM 154. The number of times of digestion game is the number of game times that have been digested without re-entering the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of digestion games when determining the contents of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined notice display is easily selected in the notice lottery process. Execute the following process.

  When it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1701: NO), or after the game number update process has been executed, it is determined whether a fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received. (S1709). If it is determined that a fixed stop command has been received (S1709: YES), a symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1710). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game time on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

  When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S1709: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command is executed, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1711). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1711: YES), the winning number update process is executed (S1712). In the update process, a process for updating the win counter is executed so that 1 is added to the win count measured in the win counter provided in the various counter areas 154d of the voice side RAM 154. Note that the number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called consecutive hits) that occur without shifting to the low-frequency support mode after shifting to the high-frequency support mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of hits when determining the contents of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode. To be executed.

  Next, an opening handling process is executed (S1713). In the opening handling process, the type of the winning result that is the trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the opening result are determined. Execute the process for For example, the winning result for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 15R probability change winning result, and the symbol display device 80 does not combine the symbol “7” in the game game immediately before that, but the other combinations are finalized. When the stop display is made, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the result is the 15R probability change result is determined as the effect in the current opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the game round effect, the winning result with low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent winning effect, the winning promotion effect indicating that the winning value is the winning value with high game value is determined as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode. To do.

  As already described here, in the retained data area 154b of the sound side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the game stop symbol in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game turn. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 154b are cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends. . Therefore, even if the opening command does not include information on the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Further, in the opening corresponding process in step 1713, the number of hits after the update in step 1712 is specified, and an effect corresponding to the specified number of hits is set as an effect in the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 1713 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1714). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  Thereafter, a game mode flag storage process for storing a flag corresponding to the game mode flag storage area 154c is executed (S1715). That is, as described above, the opening command includes the types of hit results (15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, 15R normal hit result D, which triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode). , Or 15R probability variation result) information is also included. For this reason, if the opening command includes information that is the result A of 15R normal hit, the time mode flag A is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, and information that is the result B of 15R normal hit is included. If the time reduction mode flag B is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, and the information indicating the result C of 15R normal hit is included, the time reduction mode flag C is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c. If the stored information includes the 15R normal hit result D, the short-time mode flag D is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, and if the 15R probability change result information is included. The high probability mode flag is stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c. Thereby, in the effect pattern determination process in step 1705, the effect pattern corresponding to the game mode is determined.

  If a flag has already been stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c, a new flag is stored after erasing the stored flag. For example, when the opening command is received by winning the lottery during the time reduction mode, the time reduction mode flag corresponding to the time reduction mode is already stored. For this reason, for example, if the winning lottery is won during the short-time mode A, and the opening command includes the information of the 15R normal hit result B, after the short-time mode flag A is deleted from the game mode flag storage area 154c Stores the time reduction mode B flag. In addition, for example, if the winning lottery is won during the high probability mode and the opening command includes information that is the result of 15R normal winning B, the time is shortened after the high probability mode flag is deleted from the game mode flag storage area 154c. Stores the mode B flag.

  If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1711: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the opening command, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1716). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S1716: YES), the display side MPU 162 indicates that the opening of the variable prize winning device 60 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. Is sent to the display-side MPU 162 (S1717). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the release command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the open command has not been received (S1716: NO), or after the process of transmitting the open command is executed, it is determined whether a close command has been received (S1718). If it is determined that the close command has been received (S1718: YES), the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable prize winning device 60 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. A close command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1719). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the close command has not been received (S1718: NO), or after the process of transmitting the close command is executed, it is determined whether or not the short time mode end command has been received (S1720). If it is determined that the time reduction mode end command is received (S1720: YES), the time reduction mode flag stored in the game mode flag storage area 154c is deleted (S1721).

  If it is determined that the time reduction mode end command has not been received (S1720: NO), or after the process of deleting the game mode flag has been executed, whether or not an ending command has been received as shown in FIG. Is determined (S1801). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1801: YES), an ending correspondence process is executed (S1802). In the ending handling process, the content of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode, the high-probability mode is surely set. Therefore, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

  Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 1802 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1803). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1801: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command is executed, it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that the notification command is received (S1804: YES), it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or state change of the pachinko machine 10, is occurring in the pachinko machine 10, In order to perform the notification, a process for reading light emission data from the various data table storage areas 153a is executed (S1805), and a process for reading audio data is executed (S1806). Thereby, in the light emission control process (S1606) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 35), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and the voice control of the timer interruption process (FIG. 35). In the process (S1607), sound control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that sound corresponding to the sound data is output. The notification command includes a first non-electric actor abnormality release command and a second non-electric actor abnormality release command. For this reason, if the first non-electric role 66 or the second non-electric role 67 is in an abnormally open state due to some cause, the first non-electric role 66 or the second non-electric role 66 or 2 It is notified that the non-electric player 67 is in an abnormal open state. Thereafter, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1807). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so that notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1804: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether a release command has been received (S1808). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. For this reason, if it is determined that a release command has been received (S1808: YES), this means that an event to be notified such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been released. In order to cancel the notification, the cancel setting process is executed (S1809). Thereafter, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1810). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

  When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1808: NO), or after the release command has been transmitted, it is determined whether a non-electric actor release command has been received (S1811). Specifically, in step 1811, it is determined whether or not a first non-electric actor release command or a second non-electric actor release command has been received. The first non-electric player release command is a command that is set when a game ball wins in the left space K1 of the normal winning port 59a in the non-electric player state grasping process (FIG. 20) (S304). ). That is, the first non-electric actor release command indicates that the game ball comes into contact with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 and the first non-electric actor 66 enters the open state (maintains the open state). It is a command to show. The second non-electric player release command is a command that is set when a game ball wins in the right space K2 of the normal winning port 59a in the non-electric player state grasping process (FIG. 20) (S306). ). In other words, the second non-electric actor release command indicates that the game ball comes into contact with the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 and the second non-electric actor 67 enters the open state (maintains the open state). It is a command to show.

  For this reason, when it is determined that the first non-electric actor release command or the second non-electric actor release command has been received (S1811: YES), the corresponding non-electric actor is in the open state. In order to notify, the corresponding light emission data is read from the various data table storage area 153a (S1812), and the corresponding audio data is read (S1813). As a result, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 35), the light emission control process (S1606) of the illumination unit 33 and the sound control process (S1607) of the speaker unit 34 for notifying that the corresponding non-electric actor is in the open state. Executed. Thereafter, a non-electric actor release command corresponding to the content of the non-electric actor release command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1814). Although the control by the display side MPU 162 receiving the non-electric character release command will be described later, when the display side MPU 162 receives the non-electric character release command, the notification corresponding to the received non-electric character release command is issued. The display control of the symbol display device 80 is performed so as to be performed.

  When it is determined that the non-electric actor release command has not been received (S1811: NO), or after the non-electric actor release command has been transmitted, it is determined whether a non-electric actor closure command has been received. (S1815). Specifically, in step 1815, it is determined whether a first non-electric actor close command or a second non-electric actor close command has been received. The first non-electric actor closing command is a command set when the first non-electric actor 66 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the non-electric actor state grasping process (FIG. 21) ( S405). The second non-electric actor closing command is a command that is set when the second non-electric actor 67 changes from the open state to the closed state (S412).

  For this reason, when it determines with having received the 1st non-electric actor close command or the 2nd non-electric actor closure command (S1815: YES), the non-electric actor corresponding to the received command is a closed state. Therefore, the cancel setting process for canceling the notification that the non-electric actor has already been opened is executed (S1816). Thereafter, a non-electric actor closing command corresponding to the content of the non-electric actor closing command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1817). The control performed when the display-side MPU 162 receives the non-electric actor closing command will be described later. When the display-side MPU 162 receives the non-electric actor closing command, the notification corresponding to the received non-electric actor closing command is issued. Display control of the symbol display device 80 is performed so that the execution ends.

  When it is determined that the non-electric actor release command has not been received (S1815: NO), or after the non-electric actor closure command has been transmitted, other corresponding processing is executed (S1818). In other handling processing, for example, when a hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when a shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. . Thus, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt and Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved information in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored in the reserved area. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 80.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the display-side MPU 162. This V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec cycle.

  The VDP 165 of the display control device 93, when outputting an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display screen 80a when viewed from the front, Sequentially output image signals to dots arranged on a horizontal line including one end, and output image signals from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner portion. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, so that the display-side MPU 162 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal.

  However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started. Further, as described above, when no data is set in each of the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data indicating blanks is set), the reserved symbol display is performed. In the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the display area 167a, no image is displayed or the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 A background image is displayed.

  In the V interrupt process, first, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 are analyzed (S1901). Note that commands are sequentially stored in the command storage area 164a by a command storage process that is started when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 92. The command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area 164a. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 1901, it is determined whether a new command has been received (S1902). If it is determined that a new command has been received (S1902: YES), command response processing is performed. Execute (S1903).

  Here, the command response processing in step 1903 in the V interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing command response processing.

  In the command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and a pattern command are received (S2001). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2001: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written in the work RAM 164 (S2002), the command corresponding process is terminated.

  The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

  In the pattern data table, pointer information corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game time is set, and task content information and command output are associated with each pointer information. The presence / absence information and additional data information are set.

  The task content information is information that is set to display a video corresponding to the current game round. In the frame, an image corresponding to the information of the task content is displayed. In the information on the contents of the task, parameter information necessary for instructing the VDP 165 to perform a drawing instruction in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the display-side MPU 162 to the voice-side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, by causing the display-side MPU 162 to output a command to the audio-side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, the various light-emitting units including the illumination unit 33 respond to the content of the image. It is possible to produce an effect of light, and it is possible to execute an effect of producing an audio according to the content of the image at the speaker unit 34.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and writing processing to the additional data is executed when a notification command is received or a notice response effect command is received. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content.

  If it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2001: NO), it is determined whether a confirmed stop command has been received (S2003). If it is determined that a fixed stop command has been received (S2003: YES), after executing a fixed stop setting process (S2004), the command response process is terminated. In the setting process for the fixed stop, a work table 164 is read out from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163 by reading a data table for stationary display corresponding to the current game round until the fixed stop display period elapses. Execute the process to write to.

  If it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2003: NO), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2005). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2005: YES), after performing the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2006), this The command response process is terminated.

  The opening data table is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  In the opening data table, contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until the corresponding round game is completed, and similarly, the data corresponding to the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. And the range of the information which should be referred in the data table for opening is switched with reception of an open command or a close command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result is 15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, or 15R normal hit result D, the precautions regarding the time reduction mode are displayed during the round game. That is, in the case of a 15R normal hit result, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the mode shifts to the time reduction mode. For this reason, in the opening data table, contents for displaying the game method in the time-saving mode during the round game are also defined.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the final round (15 rounds) in the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 40, “the remaining number of first lottery games”, “the remaining number of second lottery games”, and “maximum “Remaining number of times” is displayed, and “Right-handed may end when any remaining number of times becomes zero !?” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), it is displayed that when the game ball is launched aiming at the arrow A (inner area R1), the remaining number of times of the first lottery game and the maximum remaining number of times decrease. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), it is displayed that the remaining number of times of the second lottery game and the maximum remaining number of times decrease when the game ball is launched aiming at the arrow B (outside region R2). Thereby, the player can grasp that the right-handed (short-time mode) is ended when any of the remaining number of first lottery games, the remaining number of second lottery games, or the maximum remaining number of times becomes 0, and the game It is possible to grasp which remaining number is reduced depending on how the ball is launched.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 39), if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2005: NO), it is determined whether any of the open command or the close command has been received ( S2007). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2007: YES), the setting process at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2008), and then this command handling process is terminated. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

  If it is determined that the opening command and the closing command have not been received (S2007: NO), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2009). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2009: YES), after executing a setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S1810), this The command response process is terminated.

  The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2009: NO), the separate response process (S1811) is executed, and then the command response process is terminated.

  Next, another handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing another handling process.

  In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a notification command is received (S2101). If it is determined that the notification command is received (S2101: YES), the notification data setting processing is executed (S2102), and then the individual response processing is terminated. In the notification data setting processing, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written in the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2101: NO), it is determined whether a release command has been received (S2103). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2103: YES), the notification data clear process is executed (S2104), and then the corresponding process is terminated. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2103: NO), it is determined whether a non-electric actor release command has been received (S2105). If it is determined that the non-electric actor release command has been received (S2105: YES), the non-electric actor release data setting process is executed (S2106). In the setting process of the non-electric actor release data, the release data corresponding to the received non-electric actor release command is written in the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table. Thus, the contents of the release data are reflected at the next image update. In the present embodiment, when the first non-electric actor release command is received as the non-electric actor release command, as shown in FIG. 43A, the first non-electric actor is displayed on the right side of the display screen 80a as viewed from the front. A figure showing that 66 is in an open state and characters “The lower side is open !!” are displayed. Further, when the second non-electric actor release command is received, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the second non-electric actor 67 is in an open state on the right side of the display screen 80a when viewed from the front. , And the characters “The upper side is open !!” are displayed. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize the non-electric player in the open state, and can clearly grasp the special start port that can win the game ball. Although not particularly illustrated, when both the first non-electric actor 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are in an open state, an image combining FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) is displayed. The

  Returning to the description of the separate handling process (FIG. 42), if it is determined that a non-electric actor release command has not been received (S2105: NO), it is determined whether a non-electric actor closure command has been received. (S2107). If it is determined that the non-electric character closing command has been received (S2107: YES), the non-electric character release data clear process is executed (S2108). In the non-electric actor release data clear process, a process for clearing the release data corresponding to the non-electric actor closure command received this time is executed. That is, when the first non-electric actor close command is received, a process for clearing the data added when the first non-electric actor release command is received is executed. When the second non-electric actor close command is received, a process for clearing the data added when the second non-electric actor release command is received is executed. Thereby, at the next image update, the release data targeted for cancellation is deleted.

  If it is determined that the non-electric actor closing command has not been received (S2107: NO), the other handling process is executed (S2109), and then the individual handling process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received, and if it is determined that a hold command has been received, display of hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to an increase in the number of holds. The information to be changed is written into the work RAM 164. In addition, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the first start port 56 and the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58 is a hold information for winning, On the display screen 80a, the display of the number of reserves on the winning side is increased. If it is determined that the notice response effect command has been received, response effect data corresponding to the notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) is written. Thereby, the response effect with respect to the notice effect is started after the next image update timing.

  Also, it is determined whether or not a shift command is received. If it is determined that a shift command is received, a shift setting process is performed. In the setting process at the time of shifting, information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in each of the unit areas RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is stored in the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, the shift command includes information about which reserved symbol information is to be shifted. Therefore, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first command is displayed. Information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the unit area RE1 → execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RE2 → first unit area RE1, third unit area RE3 → second unit area RE2, fourth unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when the second reserved symbol display area RF is shifted, information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → first unit area RF1. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RF3 → second unit area RF2, and the fourth unit area RF4 → third unit area RF3, is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area with a smaller number.

  Further, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, a data table for performing a demo display is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 is read. Execute the process to write to. Further, it is determined whether or not a stage change command has been received. If a stage change command has been received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is obtained from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. A process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. Thereby, for example, when the game time variation display is not performed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 38), if it is determined that there is no new command (S1902: NO), or if the command response process in step 1903 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (S1904). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display-side MPU 162 can grasp the processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  Next, task processing is executed (S1905). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by the display side MPU 162.

  In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table (S2001). If it is determined that there is no additional data (S2001). : NO), the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table (S2002). Then, after executing a parameter derivation process for performing calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 165 to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing based on the read task data (S2003). ), This task processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information (S2001: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data for the task data image. Is determined (S2004). If it is determined that the data is additional data (S2004: YES), the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table (S2005). Then, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing based on the read task data and additional data, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 165 is performed (S2006). This task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step 2005 and step 2006 is performed, the case where the character image of an alert | report is added etc. are mentioned.

  If it is determined that the additional data is not additional data (S2004: NO), the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table (S2007). Then, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing on the basis of the read additional data, a parameter derivation process for performing a parameter calculation necessary for performing a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 is executed ( S2008), the task processing is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step 2007 and step 2008 is performed, the case where the response effect with respect to a notice effect is displayed is mentioned.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 38), after executing the task process of step 1905, whether or not command data exists in the area of presence / absence of command output corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table. It is determined whether or not it is command output timing (S1906). If command data exists, it is determined that the command output timing is reached (S1906: YES), and command setting processing is executed (S1907). In this command setting process, a command is transmitted based on timing (pointer information) determined to be command output timing. Specifically, a command indicating that the game round effect should be started, a command indicating that the notice effect should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, A command indicating that the variation should be ended, a command indicating that the production in the opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and indicating that the production of the ending should be started A command, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 in accordance with each timing.

  In this case, a command indicating that the notice effect should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that opening and closing execution mode effects should be started, and a round The command indicating that the production of the interval between the games should be started and the command indicating that the production of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the production.

  The command indicating that the notice effect should be started, the command indicating that the normal reach should be started, the command indicating that the super reach should be started, and the command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended include Information indicating how many frames after the output timing should start the target effect is included. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the target effect for each command, the audio-side MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target target effect on the symbol display device 80. It is possible to cause the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 to start a target effect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main MPU 112 is used as a reference, the voice MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display MPU 162, but the voice MPU 152 transmits a command transmitted from the display MPU 162. The control of the effect is also executed based on the above. For this reason, it becomes difficult to generate | occur | produce a shift | offset | difference between the light emission effect performed by the audio | voice side MPU152, and the audio | voice effect, and the display effect performed by the display side MPU162, and the effect using each effect means is performed suitably. Can do.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 38), when it is determined that it is not the command output timing (S1906: NO), or when the command setting process of step 1907 is executed, the drawing list output process is executed (S1908). ) This V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 165. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  The above is the execution and notification execution control in the present embodiment. Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 during the time reduction mode will be described.

  In the time reduction mode, as described above, the symbol display device 80 displays the remaining number of first lottery games, the remaining number of second lottery games, and the maximum remaining number of times. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode ends and the mode shifts to the time reduction mode, the symbol display device 80 displays the remaining number of first lottery games, the remaining number of second lottery games, and the maximum remaining number of times. As shown, the minimum remaining (execution) number of each lottery game initially assumed is displayed. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the minimum remaining (execution) number of the first lottery game initially assumed is 20 times in the case of the time reduction mode B. In addition, the minimum remaining (execution) number of times of the second lottery game initially assumed is 20 times in the case of the time reduction mode C. The maximum remaining (execution) number of lottery games is 100 times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), 20 times are displayed as the remaining number of first lottery games, 20 times are displayed as the remaining number of second lottery games, and 100 times are displayed as the maximum remaining number of games. Is done.

  When the first lottery game or the second lottery game is executed, the corresponding remaining number is displayed by subtracting one by one. For example, when the player continues to fire the game ball so as to pass through the inner region R1, the game ball wins the first special start port 57 and the first lottery game is executed. For example, when the first lottery game is continuously executed 19 times, the remaining number of first lottery games is reduced to 1 and displayed as shown in FIG. Also, for example, if the player continues to fire a game ball so as to pass the outer region R2 after the remaining number of first lottery games is displayed and displayed, the game ball enters the second special start port 58. The second lottery game is executed after winning. For example, when the second lottery game is continuously executed 19 times, the remaining number of times of the second lottery game is reduced to 1 and displayed as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, for example, when the remaining number of times of the first lottery game becomes 0, a continuation effect indicating whether or not the time reduction mode is ended is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the symbol display device 80 displays the first frame button 26 and the characters “Press!”.

  Then, when the time reduction mode ends, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the characters “Sorry!” Are displayed. On the other hand, when the time reduction mode does not end (when continuing), as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the characters “continue!” Are displayed and the remaining number of times of the first lottery game is displayed again. Is done. In this case, the minimum remaining (execution) number of the first lottery game assumed again is displayed in the remaining number of times of the first lottery game. That is, when the first lottery game is executed 20 times and the time-saving mode continues, it is one of the time-saving mode A, the time-saving mode B, or the time-saving mode D, and the minimum remaining of the assumed first lottery game Since the number of times is 30 times that is the difference between 50 times that are the short-time mode A and 20 times that are initially displayed, 30 times is displayed as the remaining number of times of the first lottery game. Thereby, the player can recognize that the first lottery game can be further executed at least 30 times. Although not shown in particular, the same display is displayed when the second lottery game is executed and the remaining number of times of the second lottery game becomes zero.

  In other words, in this embodiment, in the time-saving mode A, the time-saving mode B, the time-saving mode C, and the time-saving mode D, the termination conditions for ending the time-saving mode are different. However, the display mode does not cause discomfort to the gaming machine.

  The above is the configuration of the gaming machine in the present embodiment. Next, a gaming method in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.

  First, in the normal mode, even if the player hits the game ball to the right and passes the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 61, it is difficult to win the normal symbol winning lottery, and the open / close plate 59b is not easily opened. That is, it is difficult for the game ball to win the normal winning opening 59a, and the first non-electric player 66 and the second non-electric player 67 are unlikely to be in the open state, so the first special start opening 57 and the second special start opening 58 Game balls are difficult to win. Further, when the player hits the game ball to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to win the first starting port 56. Therefore, in the normal mode, the player expects that the game ball will be left-handed so as to win the first starting port 56, and the first lottery game will win the lottery and enter the opening / closing execution mode. While continuing the game. Note that the normal mode here means that the lottery mode related to the winning lottery is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  When the first lottery game is won, the combination of the same symbols is displayed on any one of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol display device 80, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. However, in this embodiment, in the case of the 15R normal hit result, the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode by the combination of the same symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 is the 15R normal hit result A, 15R. It is made difficult for the player to recognize the normal hit result B, the 15R normal hit result C, or the 15R normal hit result D.

  Then, after the open / close execution mode ends, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is entered regardless of whether the hit type is a probability change hit result or a normal hit result. In the high frequency support mode, since it is easy to win the normal symbol winning lottery, the player can easily open the open / close plate 59b by hitting the game ball to the right so as to pass through the normal symbol starting gate 61. . When the game ball wins the normal winning opening 59a, the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69, whereby the first non-electric component 66 or the second non-electric player 67. Is in an open state, and it becomes easy for a game ball that has not won the normal winning opening 59a to win the first special starting opening 57 or the second special starting opening 58. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball to the right because the player can execute the first lottery game or the second lottery game without reducing the number of held balls.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present embodiment continues to fire the game ball aiming at the inner region R1, thereby opening the first non-electric player 66 and winning the game ball at the first special start port 57. The second non-electric actor 67 can be opened to allow the second special start port 58 to win the game ball by continuously firing the game ball aiming at the outer region R2. Yes. In other words, the player can select either the first lottery game or the second lottery game to be executed by the player himself.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a 15R normal hit result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as described above, the time reduction mode A and the time reduction mode B Then, the mode shifts to either the time reduction mode C or the time reduction mode D (see FIG. 17). In the time reduction mode, the symbol display device 80 displays the remaining number of first lottery games, the remaining number of second lottery games, and the maximum remaining number of times (see FIGS. 45 and 46) and stays. An effect suggesting the short mode is displayed.

  For this reason, the player estimates whether he / she is staying in the time reduction mode A, the time reduction mode B, the time reduction mode C, or the time reduction mode D and, depending on the estimated stay mode, the first special start port 57 or the second A game ball is fired so as to win one of the special start ports 58.

  For example, if the player is assumed to be in the short-time mode B, the short-time mode B satisfies the end condition A and ends the short-time mode when the first lottery game is executed 20 times. The game balls are then fired and the second special start port 58 is awarded a game ball so that the second lottery game is executed. When the actual time-saving mode is the time-saving mode B, it is possible to prevent the time-saving mode from being terminated early by allowing the player to continuously execute the second lottery game. However, for example, when the actual time reduction mode is the time reduction mode C, when the second lottery game is executed 20 times, the end condition B is satisfied and the time reduction mode ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the number of times the short-time mode ends changes depending on how the game ball is launched (the lottery game to be executed). That is, as described with reference to FIG. 17 above, depending on the manner in which the player's game ball is fired, in the time reduction mode A, the number of times the time reduction mode ends changes between 50 and 100 times. In the case of B or the time-short mode C, the number of times the time-short mode ends is changed between 20 and 100 times. Moreover, it can be said that the continuation rate changes when the number of times the time-saving mode ends changes. For this reason, in this embodiment, it can be said that the game can be given a new gameability in which the continuation rate changes depending on how the game balls are fired (the lottery game to be executed). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the player first causes one lottery game to be executed until the remaining number of first lottery games or second lottery games approaches 0, and then the other lottery game. Is executed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 46A), even if the time-saving mode B or the time-saving mode C is used, the time-saving mode can be continued at least 20 times. . In other words, the configuration is such that the player can easily feel that the number of times the short-time mode ends is changed by changing the manner of launching the game ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, the first special start port 57 provided with the first non-electric player 66, the second special start port 58 provided with the second non-electric player 67, the variable ordinary winning device 59, and the like. The game ball won in the variable ordinary winning device 59 is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69 by the partition member 59d. The left discharge passage 68 is provided with a first non-electric actor actuating mechanism 70 that brings the first non-electric actor 66 into an open state by contacting the game ball, and the right discharge passage 69 includes a game ball. Is provided with a second non-electric actor actuating mechanism 71 that brings the second non-electric actor 67 into an open state.

  Therefore, by allowing the player to select whether the game ball is to be discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69, the game ball is first special start port 57 or second special start port. It is possible to give a gameability of selecting which of 58 to make it easier to win, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the game balls won in the normal winning opening 59a are distributed to the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69 by the common partition member 59d. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which distributes the game ball to the left discharge passage 68 and the member which distributes the game ball to the right discharge passage 69 are provided separately, the number of parts can be reduced.

  Further, the partition member 59d is provided so as to divide the space in the normal winning opening 59a into a left space K1 and a right space K2. The game balls won in the left space K1 are discharged from the left discharge passage 68, and the game balls won in the right space K2 are discharged from the right discharge passage 69.

  For this reason, the player selects whether to fire a game ball so as to win in the left space K1 of the normal winning port 59a or to play a game ball so as to win in the right space K2 of the normal winning port 59a. Thus, it is possible to select whether the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged from the discharge passage that is not intended by the player, and it is possible to suppress the opening of a non-electric player different from the non-electric player desired by the player.

  Furthermore, a partitioning mechanism 72 that partitions the region along the traveling direction (downward direction) of the game ball is disposed in the region until the game ball reaches the variable ordinary winning device 59. Specifically, the partition mechanism 72 includes an inner region R1 for guiding the game ball toward the left space K1 in the normal winning opening 59a and an outer region R2 for guiding the game ball toward the right space K2 in the normal winning opening 59a. It arrange | positions so that it may partition. For this reason, when a player wins a game ball in the normal winning port 59a by launching a game ball aiming at either the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 positioned in front of the normal winning port 59a, It can be selected whether the sphere wins the left space K1 or the right space K2. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the game ball from being discharged from the discharge passage not intended by the player. In other words, it is possible to prevent the non-electric player from unintended by the player from being released and making it easier for the game ball to win a winning opening not intended by the player.

  Moreover, the opening width | variety of the entrance of inner side area | region R1 is made longer than the entrance of outer side area | region R2. For this reason, it becomes easy to allow the game ball to pass through the inner region R1 where it is difficult for the player to aim, and it is easy to win the game ball in the left space K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged from the discharge passage that is not intended by the player, and it is possible to suppress a non-electric player having a different non-electric player from the non-electric player desired by the player.

  Further, the nail 51, the first special starting port 57, and the variable ordinary winning device 59 fire the game ball so that the player can win the left space K1 when the game ball is fired so as to pass through the inner region R1. The game ball is arranged so as to win from the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a or be guided to the first special starting opening 57. For this reason, the player wins the game ball from the left space K1 to make the first non-electric player 66 open, and the first special start port 57 wins the game ball. There is no need to change the manner in which the game balls are fired.

  Similarly, the nail 51, the second special start port 58, and the variable ordinary prize-winning device 59, when the player launches the game ball so as to pass through the outer region R2, the game ball When launched, the game ball is arranged to win from the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a or to be guided to the second special starting opening 58. For this reason, the player wins the game ball from the right space K2 to make the second non-electric player 67 open, and the second special start port 58 wins the game ball. There is no need to change the manner in which the game balls are fired.

  Therefore, the player recognizes that it is bothersome to launch the game ball for opening the first non-electric player 66 and the game ball for opening the second non-electric player 67. This can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a time-shortening mode A, a time-shortening mode B, a time-shortening mode C, and a time-shortening mode D are mounted so that the end conditions are different in each time-shortening mode. Specifically, at least the number of times the first lottery game is executed, the number of times the second lottery game is executed, and the sum of the number of times the first lottery game is executed and the number of times the second lottery game is executed Either one is different. In addition, when the first lottery game or the second lottery game is won and the lottery is won, the symbol display device 80 displays the combination of the same symbols in a stopped manner. However, after the opening / closing execution mode, the time reduction mode A, the time reduction mode B, the time reduction mode When transitioning to C or the short-time mode D, the player is prevented from accurately knowing which short-time mode to transition to depending on the combination of symbols. That is, when shifting to the time-saving mode A, the time-saving mode B, the time-saving mode C, or the time-saving mode D, the same symbol combination may be displayed. For this reason, when shifting to the time-saving mode, the time-saving mode is changed due to the new gameability of allowing the player to select the lottery game to be executed while guessing the time-saving mode in which he / she is staying, and the player's own selection. It is possible to give a new gameability that the number of times of ending changes (the continuation rate changes). For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  Further, in the symbol display device 80, in the time reduction mode A, the time reduction mode B, the time reduction mode C, or the time reduction mode D, an effect (suggestion) pattern corresponding to the time reduction mode in which the user is staying may be displayed. I am doing so. For this reason, the attention degree regarding a player's performance can be improved, and the interest in a game can be improved by extension.

  Further, the symbol display device 80 displays the remaining number of first lottery games, the remaining number of second lottery games, and the maximum remaining number of times. For this reason, it can suppress that a player holds disgust in game nature by the time-saving mode ending unexpectedly.

  In the present embodiment, the first special start port 57 is easy to win a game ball when the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state, and when the first non-electric player 66 is in a closed state. Are arranged so that it is difficult to win game balls. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a (the first non-electric player 66 is opened or maintained), a predetermined value is set in the first start winning counter. (In the present embodiment, 2) is set, and when the game ball wins the first special start port 57, if the value of the first start win counter is 0, the game stop process is executed (FIG. 21, S406). . In other words, in the present embodiment, the game stop process is executed when the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state without the passage of the game ball being detected by the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a due to some factor.

  Similarly, the second special start port 58 allows the game ball to be easily won when the second non-electric player 67 is in the open state, and the game ball can be won when the second non-electric player 67 is in the closed state. It is arranged to make it difficult to win a prize. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a (the second non-electric player 67 is in the open state or is maintained in the open state), a predetermined value is set in the second start winning counter. (In this embodiment, 2) is set, and when a game ball wins the second special start port 58, if the value of the second start win counter is 0, the game stop process is executed (FIG. 21, S413). . In other words, in the present embodiment, the game stop process is executed when the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state without the passage of the game ball being detected by the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a due to some factor. For this reason, it can suppress that a game is continued while the 1st non-electric player 66 or the 2nd non-electric player 67 is in an abnormal open state, and can suppress that game nature is impaired.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
A modification of the first embodiment will be described. For example, in the first embodiment, the partition member 59d is movably provided in the normal winning opening 59a, and the game ball won in the normal winning opening 59a is either the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69 every predetermined period. It may be discharged from one side. Even in such a configuration, the player adjusts the period (timing) for winning the game ball in the normal winning opening 59a, so that the game ball won in the normal winning opening 59a is left-side discharge passage 68 or right-side discharge passage 69. It is possible to select which of the two is to be discharged. That is, the player adjusts the period (timing) during which the game ball is won in the normal winning opening 59a, thereby determining whether the first non-electric component 66 or the second non-electric component 67 is opened. You can choose. Therefore, the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained. When the partition member 59d is movably provided, the partition member 59d may be moved randomly (so that the player cannot select a place to win a prize). Even in such a configuration, when the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state, the player causes the first special start port 57 to win the game ball by firing the game ball aiming at the inner region R1. When the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second special start port 58 by firing the game ball aiming at the outer region R2. That is, even with such a configuration, the player can select which of the first lottery game and the second lottery game is to be executed, so that the same effect as in the first embodiment can be obtained. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the partitioning mechanism 72 may not be provided, and the player may directly launch the game ball aiming at the left space K1 or the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the partition member 59d may not be provided. Even in such a configuration, when the player hits the game ball to the right, the game ball passes through either the inner region R1 or the outer region R2. Then, when the opening / closing plate 59b is in the open state, when passing through the inner region R1, it is easy to win from the left side when viewed from the front of the normal winning port 59a and to be discharged from the left discharge passage 68, and when passing through the outer region R2, the normal winning port 59a It is easy to win from the right side discharge passage 69 after winning from the right side when viewed from the front. Therefore, the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In the first embodiment, only one normal symbol starting gate 61 may be provided instead of two. In other words, the game balls that have not won the normal winning opening 59a pass through the common normal symbol starting gate 61 and are then guided to the first special starting opening 57 or the second special starting opening 58. Good.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a is disposed on the downstream side of the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, and the right discharge passage is provided. The detection sensor 69 a is disposed on the downstream side of the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71. However, the left discharge passage detection sensor 68 a may be disposed upstream of the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, and the right discharge passage detection sensor 69 a is more than the second non-electric actor operation mechanism 71. It may be arranged on the upstream side. In this case, for example, the detection sensor 68a may be disposed in the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a, or the detection sensor 69a may be disposed in the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a. Good. That is, in the first embodiment, the detection sensor 68a can detect the game ball that has won the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a and is in contact with the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70, and the detection sensor 69a is normally The location of the game is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to detect the game ball coming into contact with the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 by winning the right space K2 of the winning opening 59a.

  In the first embodiment, in addition to the left discharge passage detection sensor 68a and the right discharge passage detection sensor 69a, a left winning detection sensor (first sub detection sensor) is provided in the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a. A right winning detection sensor (second sub detection sensor) is provided in the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a, and the number of game balls won in the left space K1 matches the number of game balls discharged from the left discharge passage 68. And whether or not the number of game balls won in the right space K2 and the number of game balls discharged from the right discharge passage 69 coincide with each other may be determined. According to this, for example, although the number of game balls won in the normal winning opening 59a does not match the number of game balls discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69, the first non-electric When the accessory 66 or the second non-electric actor 67 is in an open state, it is assumed that the first non-electric actor 66 or the second non-electric actor 67 is in an abnormally open state. The For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first non-electric component 66 or the second non-electric component 67 is in an abnormal open state. The left winning detection sensor only needs to be able to detect that a game ball has won in the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a, and is thus arranged upstream of the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 in the left discharge passage 68. It may be. Similarly, the right winning detection sensor only needs to be able to detect that the game ball has won the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a, and is thus arranged upstream of the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 in the right discharge passage 69. May be. That is, it is only necessary that a pair of detection sensors be arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side of the discharge passage with the non-electric actor operating mechanism interposed therebetween. Further, when the left prize detection sensor and the right prize detection sensor are provided as described above, in the non-electric player state grasping process (FIGS. 20 and 21) based on the detection results of the left prize detection sensor and the right prize detection sensor. The processing of step 301 and step 302 may be executed, or the winning ball processing of the normal winning opening 59a may be executed. Furthermore, a monitoring sensor or the like for directly monitoring whether or not the first non-electric component 66 and the second non-electric component 67 are in an open state is provided, and the first non-electric component is based on the detection result of the monitoring sensor or the like. It may be determined whether or not the accessory 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are in an abnormal open state.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the left discharge passage 68 and the right discharge passage 69 are joined together on the downstream side of the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 and the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 to form one You may make it become a discharge passage. In this case, it is good also as a structure provided with one discharge passage detection sensor which detects a game ball in the part which has joined. In such a configuration, the discharge passage detection sensor provided in the joining portion determines whether the game ball is discharged from the left discharge passage 68 or the right discharge passage 69. Since it cannot be determined, it is determined whether or not the first non-electric component 66 and the second non-electric component 67 are in an abnormally open state by including the left winning detection sensor and the right winning detection sensor as described above. It is preferable to do so.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the first non-electric player 66 is in the open state, the game ball is not related to whether or not the game ball contacts the first non-electric player operation mechanism 70. You may make it become a closed state when two prizes are won. That is, the first non-electric player 66 and the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 determine whether or not the game ball has won the normal winning opening 59a after the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state. Regardless, a configuration may be adopted in which a prescribed number of game balls are always closed by winning a prize at the first special start port 57. Similarly, after the second non-electric player 67 is in an open state, it is closed when two game balls are won, regardless of whether or not the game ball contacts the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71. You may make it become. That is, the second non-electric player 67 and the second non-electric player operating mechanism 71 determine whether or not the game ball has won the normal winning opening 59a after the second non-electric player 67 is opened. Regardless, the specified number of game balls may always be closed by winning a prize at the second special start port 58. In such a configuration, in the non-electric player state grasping process (FIGS. 20 and 21), when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the left discharge passage 68 (S301: YES), the first start winning counter is If it is 1 or 2, the process proceeds to step 304 as it is, and if the first start winning counter is 0, the process of step 303 is executed so that the first non-electric component 66 is abnormally released as described above. Judgment can be performed. Similarly, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the right discharge passage 69 (S302: YES), if the second start winning counter is 1 or 2, the process proceeds to step 306 as it is, and the second starting winning counter is If it is 0, the abnormal non-opening determination of the second non-electric actor 67 can be executed by executing the processing of step 305 in the same manner as described above.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when one game ball comes into contact with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, the first non-electric actor 66 is not opened, but the first non-electric actor is activated. A plurality of game balls such as two or three may come into contact with the mechanism 70 so that the first non-electric player 66 is in an open state. Similarly, when one game ball comes into contact with the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71, the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 is not opened, but two or more You may make it the 2nd non-electric player 67 be in an open state by a plurality of game balls, such as three, contacting. In this case, for example, a left discharge passage passage counter and a right discharge passage passage counter are provided, and when the game ball passes through the left discharge passage 68 in the non-electric player state grasping process (FIGS. 20 and 21), the left discharge passage passage is performed. The value of the counter is added, and when the game ball passes through the right discharge passage 69, the value of the right discharge passage passage counter is added. Then, when a game ball necessary for the first non-electric player 66 to be in the open state passes through the left discharge passage 68 (the value of the left discharge passage passage counter and the first non-electric player 66 are in the open state). When the number of game balls necessary for the game matches, the processing after step 303 is executed. Similarly, when a game ball necessary for the second non-electric player 67 to be in the open state passes through the right discharge passage 69 (the value of the right discharge passage passage counter and the second non-electric player 67 are in the open state). When the number of game balls required to become the same), the processing after step 305 is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the abnormal release determination of the first non-electric component 66 and the second non-electric component 67 as described above.

  It should be noted that the condition for the first non-electric player 66 to be in a closed state can be changed as appropriate, and the first non-electric player 66 is awarded when one, three, or more game balls win the first special start port 57. The electric utility item 66 may be in a closed state. Similarly, the conditions under which the second non-electric player 67 is closed can be changed as appropriate, and the second special start port 58 receives the second game ball when one, or more than two game balls wins. The non-electric player 67 may be in a closed state. In this case, the value set in the first start prize counter in step 303 may be changed as appropriate, and the value set in the second start prize counter in step 305 may be changed as appropriate.

  In the first embodiment, the nail 51, the first special start port 57, the second special start port 58, the variable normal winning device 59, the normal symbol start gate 61, the left discharge passage 68, the right discharge passage 69, the first The arrangement relationship of the non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71, and the like can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58 may be juxtaposed in the left-right direction in front view of the game board 43. Further, the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 may be provided in the left discharge passage 68, and the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 may be provided in the right discharge passage 69. In this configuration, when a player wins a game ball at the first special start port 57, first, the player places the first non-electric player 66 in an open state by firing the game ball toward the outer region R2, and the inner side. A game ball can be awarded to the first special start port 57 by firing the game ball toward the region R1. In addition, when the player wins a game ball at the second special start port 58, the player first releases the game ball toward the inner region R1 to open the second non-electric player 67, and enters the outer region R2. The game ball can be awarded to the second special start port 58 by firing the game ball toward the player. For this reason, the method of launching a game ball that opens a non-electric actor is different from the method of launching a game ball that wins a game ball at a special start port equipped with the non-electric actor. It is difficult for the player to recognize that the game is monotonous, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early. Further, the first special start port 57, the second special start port 58, and the normal symbol start gate 61 may be disposed above the variable normal winning device 59.

  In the first embodiment, the distribution table is changed, and the normal hit results (short time mode) are not four types, but the normal hit results (short time mode) may be two types or three types. And five or more types may be sufficient. Furthermore, in the distribution result, only the 15R normal hit result may be used, and the probability change hit result may be eliminated. That is, in the distribution determination process in step 705 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 25, S507), the distribution relating to the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, but only the distribution of the number of times of the high frequency support mode (short time mode) is performed. You may make it do. In the time-saving mode A, the time-saving mode B, the time-saving mode C, and the time-saving mode D, the values of the end condition A, the end condition B, and the end condition C can be changed as appropriate. In each time-saving mode, the end condition C defined by the sum of the number of times the first lottery game is executed and the number of times the second lottery game is executed may be different. Furthermore, when it is a winning result, a winning result that is not given the high-frequency support mode may be included.

  And in the said 1st Embodiment, when the remaining number of times of a 1st lottery game or a 2nd lottery game becomes 0, the remaining number of times displayed newly can be changed suitably. For example, in the time reduction mode D, after the first lottery game is executed 20 times, the remaining number of times of the first lottery game may be displayed as 80 times. According to this, the player can clearly grasp that the mode is the short-time mode D, and the subsequent game can continue the game while paying attention to the effect. Further, an effect that allows the user to clearly understand the time-saving mode in which the user is staying in the time-saving mode may be displayed by lottery or the like. Furthermore, when shifting to the time-saving mode by lottery or the like, accurate numbers may be displayed as the remaining number of first lottery games and the remaining number of second lottery games from the beginning. For example, in the short time mode A, 50 may be displayed as the remaining number of first lottery games and 50 may be displayed as the remaining number of second lottery games.

  Further, in the first embodiment, not only the effect according to the stay mode is displayed during the time reduction mode but also the next time reduction mode is suggested during the round of the opening / closing execution mode that triggers the transition to the time reduction mode. An effect may be displayed. For example, a character or the like may be displayed in a predetermined round, and the next time reduction mode may be suggested by the displayed character.

  In the first embodiment, when the winning lottery is won again during the time-saving mode and the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode, and then the time-saving mode is changed again (when consecutively winning), the time-saving mode is set during the opening / closing execution mode. An image for displaying the game method may not be displayed. That is, the game method in the time reduction mode may be displayed during the opening / closing execution mode only when the mode is first shifted to the time reduction mode.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the end condition for ending the high-frequency support mode is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the main RAM 114 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of main controller 91. As shown in FIG. 48, the main RAM 114 is provided with a high frequency support mode flag storage area 114r instead of the short time mode flag storage area 114g, and includes a first short time mode number counter area 114h and a second short time mode number counter. Instead of the area 114i and the total time reduction mode number counter area 114j, one high frequency support mode number counter area 114s is provided, and a high probability mode number counter area 114t is further provided.

  Next, the distribution table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49A and 49B are diagrams for explaining the distribution table. FIG. 49A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 49B is a table for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (2nd distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on winning in the first start port 56 or the first special start port 57. It is a table. The distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second special start port 58.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, “0-14” among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0-29” is 15R as the distribution result of the game results. The normal hit result is “15 to 29”, and the 15R probability change hit result. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as the distribution result of the game result, “0-14” among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0-29” is the 15R normal hit result, “15 to 29” is assumed to be a 15R probability variation result. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability of a 15R normal hit result is 50% and the probability of a 15R probability change result is 50%, respectively. Yes.

  In addition, in the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, an end condition for ending the high frequency support mode is set, respectively. Is set in correspondence with the mode related to the winning lottery when referring to (when winning the winning lottery).

  Specifically, in the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the lottery mode in the winning lottery when being referred to is the high probability mode, the frequency is high. When the lottery game is executed 50 times as the end condition of the support mode and the lottery mode in the winning lottery when referred to is the low probability mode, the lottery game is set as the end condition of the high frequency support mode. The number of executions is 100.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 49B, when the lottery mode in the winning lottery when referred to is the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is set. When the lottery game is executed 100 times as an end condition and the lottery mode in the winning lottery when referred to is a low probability mode, the lottery game is executed as an end condition of the high frequency support mode. The number of times is 50.

  That is, in this embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to refer to the distribution table for the second result display section when the lottery mode in the winning lottery is the high probability mode. When the lottery mode in the lottery is the low probability mode, it is advantageous to refer to the distribution table for the first result display unit. That is, for the player, in the case of the high probability mode, it is advantageous to win the game ball in the second special start port 58 and win the winning lottery. In the case of the low probability mode, It is advantageous to win a game ball at the start opening 56 or the first special start opening 57 and win a lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation result is obtained, the mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, but the high probability mode is limited in number of times. Specifically, when the 15R probability variation result is obtained, the end condition of the high probability mode is set to 100 times. That is, the high probability mode of the present embodiment is a so-called ST type that shifts to the low probability mode when the lottery game is executed 100 times during the high probability mode. For example, as described above, when the win type counter is “20” and the lottery mode when the distribution table for the second result display unit is referred to is the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode is set. The end condition is 50 times. For this reason, from the 51st to the 100th after the 50 lottery games have been executed, the lottery mode is maintained in the high probability mode, but the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the following, 15R normal hit results in which the end result of the high-frequency support mode is 50 times in the hit results sorted with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit are 15R normal The hit result A, 15R normal hit result, and the end condition of the high frequency support mode is 100 times is also referred to as 15R normal hit result B. In addition, the 15R probability variation result with the end condition of the high frequency support mode being 50 times in the hit result distributed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit is the 15R probability variation result A , 15R probability variation result, and the end condition of the high frequency support mode is 100 times is also referred to as 15R probability variation result B.

  Similarly, the 15R normal hit result in the hit result assigned with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit and the end condition of the high frequency support mode being 100 times is the 15R normal hit result. C, 15R normal hit result, and the high frequency support mode end condition of 50 times is also referred to as 15R normal hit result D. In addition, the 15R probability variation result with the end condition of the high frequency support mode being 100 times in the hit result that is distributed by referring to the distribution table for the second result display unit is the 15R probability variation result C , 15R probability variation result, and the end condition of the high frequency support mode is 100 times is also referred to as 15R probability variation result D.

  Further, in the time reduction mode count storage area 113f of the main ROM 113, the number of end conditions of 15R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result B, 15R normal hit result C, and 15R normal hit result D, and 15R probability change The number of end conditions for each of the result A, the 15R probability variation result B, the 15R probability variation result C, and the 15R probability variation result D is stored.

  Next, the special figure variation start process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. This process is basically the same process as the special figure change start process described with reference to FIG. 25, and a high probability mode flag is stored in the special figure change start process described with reference to FIG. In this case, a process of adding 1 to the value of the high probability mode number counter and a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the high frequency support mode number (S718 to S721) when the high frequency support mode flag is stored. It is.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, after setting the command for variation and the type command for output handling in step 711, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f. Determination is made (S718). When it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored (S718: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high probability mode number counter stored in the high probability mode number counter area 114t (S719). The high probability mode number counter is set to the specified number after the ending time of the opening / closing execution mode resulting from the 15R probability variation result has elapsed (FIG. 52, S1309). If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored, the information stored in the winning start opening storage area 204 is not particularly grasped, and the value of the high probability mode number counter is decremented by one. In other words, in the success / failure determination process of step 703, regardless of whether the first lottery game or the second lottery game is executed, if the high probability mode flag is stored, the value of the high probability mode number counter is decremented by one.

  After decrementing the value of the high probability mode number counter by 1 or when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not stored (S718: NO), the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the high frequency support mode flag storage area 114r. It is determined whether it is stored (S720). If it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is stored (S720: YES), the value of the high-frequency support mode number counter stored in the high-frequency support mode number counter area 114s is decremented by 1 (S721). . The high frequency support mode number counter is set to the specified number after the ending time in the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 52, S1311). In addition, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is stored, the information stored in the winning start opening storage area 204 can be particularly grasped as in the case where it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is stored. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high frequency support mode number counter. That is, in the success / failure determination process of step 703, the value of the high frequency support mode number counter is decremented by 1 if the high frequency support mode flag is stored regardless of whether the first lottery game or the second lottery game is executed. To do.

  Then, after the high frequency support mode number counter is decremented by 1 or when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is not stored (S720: NO), the processing after step 716 is performed to change this special figure. End the start process.

  In the flag storing process in step 707, the 15R normal hit result flag A is stored for the 15R normal hit result A, the 15R normal hit result flag B is stored for the 15R normal hit result B, and the 15R normal hit result A is stored. In the case of the winning result C, the 15R normal hit result flag C is stored, and in the case of the 15R normal hit result D, the 15R normal hit result flag D is stored. Further, in the case of the 15R probability variation result A, the 15R probability variation result flag A is stored, in the case of the 15R probability variation result B, the 15R probability variation result flag B is stored, and in the case of the 15R probability variation result C, 15R. The probability variation hit result flag C is stored. In the case of the 15R probability variation result D, the 15R probability variation result flag D is stored.

  Next, the special figure determining process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process. This process is basically the same process as the special figure finalizing process described with reference to FIG. 27, and stores a high probability mode flag for the special figure finalizing process described with reference to FIG. Processing based on the value of the high probability mode number counter (S911 to S914), and processing based on the value of the high frequency support mode number counter when the high frequency support mode flag is stored (S915 to S918). This is an added process.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, when it is determined that the winning combination is obtained (S902: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f ( S911) When it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored (S911: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability mode number counter is 1 or more (S912). When it is determined that the value of the high probability mode number counter is not 1 or more (S912: NO), that is, when it is determined that the high probability mode number counter is 0, the high probability mode flag is deleted (S913). The probability mode end command is set as an output target (S914). Thereby, even if the high probability mode is shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode, when the specified number of times of the high probability mode ends (when the value of the high probability mode number counter becomes 0), the mode shifts to the low probability mode.

  When it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not stored after setting the high probability mode end command as an output target (S911: NO), or when it is determined that the value of the high probability mode number counter is 1 or more ( S912: YES), it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag storage area 114r stores a high frequency support mode flag (S915). When it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is stored (S915: YES), it is determined whether the value of the high frequency support mode number counter is 1 or more (S916). When it is determined that the value of the high frequency support mode number counter is not 1 or more (S916: NO), that is, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode number counter is 0, the high frequency support mode flag is deleted (S917). ), A high frequency support mode end command is set as an output target (S918).

  When it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is not stored after setting the high frequency support mode end command to be output (S915: NO), or when it is determined that the high frequency support mode number counter is 1 or more (S916: YES), after clearing the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to “0” in step 910, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special power ending process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing special electric power end processing executed by the main MPU 112. This process is basically the same process as the special electric power end process described with reference to FIG. 31, and in contrast to the special electric power end process described with reference to FIG. 31, the high probability mode number counter is stored after storing the high probability mode flag. Is a process in which a process for setting the number of high probability modes is added (S1309).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when it is determined that the result is a probability change probability (S1302: YES), after storing the high probability mode flag (S1303), the high probability mode number counter has a high probability. The number of modes is set (S1309). In the present embodiment, 100 is set as the number of high probability modes. If the high probability mode flag is already stored in step 1303, it is maintained as it is.

  After the high probability mode count is set or after the high probability mode flag is deleted in step 1304, the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the high frequency support mode flag storage area 114r (S1310). If the high-frequency support mode flag is already stored, it is maintained as it is.

  Then, based on the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n, the short time mode number is set with reference to the short time mode number storage area 113f of the main ROM 113 in the high frequency support mode number counter (S1311). Specifically, if the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the 15R normal hit result flag A (if the 15R normal hit result A), “50” is set in the high frequency support mode number counter. Set (refer to FIG. 49, 15R normal hit result A), and if it is 15R normal hit result flag B (if 15R normal hit result B), “100” is set to the high frequency support mode number counter (FIG. 49). 15R normal per-result B), and when 15R normal per-result flag C (when 15R normal per-result C), set the high frequency support mode number counter to “100” (FIG. 49, 15R normal per-result) C), when the result flag D is 15R normal hit (when the result D is 15R normal hit), It is set to "50" in Tomodo counter (see FIG 49,15R usually per result D). When the flag is 15R probability variation result flag A (if 15R probability variation result A), “50” is set to the high frequency support mode number counter (see FIG. 49, 15R probability variation result A). In the case of the result flag B (when the result B is 15R probability variation result B), the high frequency support mode number counter is set to “100” (see FIG. 49, 15R probability variation result result B), and is the 15R probability variation result flag C. In this case (when the result is C per 15R probability variation), “100” is set in the high frequency support mode number counter (see FIG. 49, result C per 15R probability variation), and when the result flag D is 15R probability variation per variation (per 15R probability variation) When the result is D), “50” is set in the high frequency support mode number counter (FIG. 49, 15R probability change appropriate) Ri reference result D).

  After the high frequency support mode frequency counter is set in the high frequency support mode frequency counter, the processing after step 1307 is executed and the special electric power end processing is terminated.

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the symbol display device 80 displays a combination of the same symbols on any of the active lines L1 to L5. Whether it is a result or a normal hit result is difficult to grasp. That is, for example, even if a combination of “7” symbols is displayed, it may be a normal hit result.

  In the case of the high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 80 displays the remaining number of times until the high frequency support mode ends. When the high-frequency support mode is started, the minimum remaining number of times assumed first is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, the minimum remaining number of times that the high frequency support mode ends (the minimum number of times that the lottery game is executed) is 15R normal hit result A, 15R probability change result A, 15R. It is 50 times in the case of the normal hit result D and the 15R probability change hit result D. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 53A, 50 times are displayed as the remaining number of times.

  When the first lottery game or the second lottery game is executed, the remaining number is displayed by subtracting one by one. In the high frequency support mode, an effect suggesting the lottery mode related to the winning lottery is displayed so that the player can guess the lottery mode.

  Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, a continuation effect as to whether or not the time reduction mode is ended is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the symbol display device 80 displays the first frame button 26 and the characters “Press!”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the high frequency support mode ends, the words “Sorry!” Are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the high frequency support mode does not end (when continuing), the characters “continue!” Are displayed and the remaining number of times is displayed again. In this case, the minimum remaining number that is assumed again is displayed as the remaining number. That is, the fact that the lottery game is executed 50 times and the opening / closing execution mode is continued is that the winning results that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode are 15R normal hit results B, 15R probability change hit results B, 15R normal hit results C or 15R probability variation result C, and the assumed minimum number of remaining lottery games is 50 times, which is the difference between 100 times and the first 50 times displayed, so the remaining number of times is 50 times. Is displayed.

  In addition, during the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming method in the high frequency support mode is also displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, the characters “Please guess from the effect whether the high probability mode or the low probability mode!” Are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the characters “If you guess that it is the low probability mode, you may aim at the arrow A !?” are displayed, and the game ball is caused to flow down as indicated by the arrow A. It suggests that it may be advantageous for the player to win a game ball in the special start port 57. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), a character “If you guess that it is a high probability mode, you should aim at the arrow B !?” is displayed, and the game ball is caused to flow down as indicated by the arrow B. It suggests that it may be advantageous for the player to win a game ball in the special start opening 58. Thereby, the player can grasp the gameability that different results can be generated by changing the manner of launching the game ball according to the lottery mode.

  Next, a gaming method in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.

  First, in the normal mode, as in the first embodiment, the player makes a left turn so that the game ball wins the first starting port 56, and the first lottery game is won to enter the opening / closing execution mode. Continue playing games with the expectation of a transition.

  When the first lottery game is a win, the symbol display device 80 displays the combination of the same symbols on any one of the active lines L1 to L5, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, the player determines whether the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a normal hit result or a probable hit result due to the combination of the same symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80. Is difficult to recognize.

  After the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the player shifts to the high-frequency support mode, so that the player hits the game ball to the right so that the game ball wins at the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58. To do. As a result, the player can continue the game without significantly reducing the ball.

  At this time, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, when the winning result is reached, the number of lottery games in which the next high-frequency support mode is ended differs depending on the lottery mode related to the winning result. That is, if the lottery mode related to the winning result is the high probability mode, the winning result obtained by winning the game ball in the second special starting port 58 and winning the winning ball in the first special starting port 57 The number of lottery games that are executed before the end of the next high frequency support mode is larger than the case where the next high frequency support mode is completed, so the probability that the player can obtain a hit result again during the next high frequency support mode Get higher. On the other hand, if the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning result obtained by winning the game ball in the first special starting port 57 and winning the game ball in the second special starting port 58 resulted in the winning result. Since the number of lottery games executed before the end of the next high frequency support mode is greater than the case, the probability that the player can obtain a hit result again during the next high frequency support mode is increased.

  For this reason, the player estimates whether the lottery mode related to the winning lottery is the high probability mode or the low probability mode from the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80, and based on the estimated result, the first special start port A game ball is awarded to either 57 or the second special start port 58. That is, when the player estimates that the stay mode is the high probability mode, the player launches the game ball so that the second special start port 58 wins the game ball, and the stay mode is the low probability mode. When guessed, the game ball may be fired so that the first special start port 57 wins the game ball.

  Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, a continuation effect as to whether or not the time reduction mode is ended is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the symbol display device 80 displays the first frame button 26 and the characters “Press!”. At this time, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the high frequency support mode ends, the characters “Sorry!” Are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the high-frequency support mode does not end (when continuing), the characters “continue!” Are displayed and the remaining number of times is displayed again.

  In the present embodiment, by displaying on the symbol display device 80 in this way, the player can clearly grasp whether the previous hit is a probability hit result or a normal hit result. In other words, if the previous winning result is triggered by the first lottery game (the game ball is won at the first special start port 57), the high frequency support mode ends at 50 times. This means that the lottery mode when winning the lottery was the high probability mode. In addition, when the previous winning result is triggered by the first lottery game, the high frequency support mode continues over 50 times because the lottery mode when winning the previous winning lottery is the low probability mode. It means that it was.

  Similarly, when the previous winning result is triggered by the second lottery game (the game ball is won at the second special start port 58), the high frequency support mode ends at 50 times. It means that the lottery mode when winning the previous winning lottery was the low probability mode. In addition, when the previous winning result is triggered by the second lottery game, the high frequency support mode continues over 50 times because the lottery mode when winning the previous winning lottery is the high probability mode. It means that it was.

  In other words, the player continues to play the game while expecting to win a lottery during the high-frequency support mode, but even if he / she does not win the lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the previous win result is the normal win result. Or whether the result is a probability variation result. In other words, even if the winning lottery is not won during the high-frequency support mode, the game mode when winning the previous winning lottery can be clearly understood, and what effects (suggestions) are easily displayed according to the lottery mode. I can understand.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the winning lottery is not won during the high frequency support mode, the player understands the effect according to the lottery mode, and when the player shifts to the high frequency support mode again. It becomes easy to guess the lottery mode. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to continue to execute the game, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, when winning the lottery to determine whether or not to enter the opening / closing execution mode, the number of times the end of the next high frequency support mode is different depending on the lottery mode when winning and the lottery game selected. ing. In addition, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 prevents the player from clearly grasping the type of the winning result. That is, the same symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display device 80 in the case of the probability variation hit result and the normal hit result. For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, the winning lottery is won by the new gameability of allowing the player to select the lottery game to be executed while guessing the mode related to the winning lottery and the player himself / herself. In this case, it is possible to give a new gameability that the number of times the next high-frequency support mode ends changes. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  Further, during the high frequency support mode, an effect (suggestion) corresponding to the lottery mode may be displayed on the symbol display device 80. For this reason, even if the high frequency support mode ends without winning the winning lottery, the player will guess the lottery mode when the player enters the high frequency support mode again by understanding the production according to the lottery mode. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to continue playing the game, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
A modification of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the second embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the symbol display device 80 displays a combination of the same symbols on any of the active lines L1 to L5. In addition, it may be possible to grasp whether the result is a probability change result or a normal result. For example, in the case of the probability variation result, the symbol display device 80 displays a combination of “7” symbols with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%), and a combination of “7” symbols is displayed. The lottery mode related to the next winning lottery may be determined to be the high probability mode. Similarly, when the result is a normal winning result, a combination of “2” symbols is displayed on the symbol display device 80 with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%), and a combination of “2” symbols is displayed. May determine that the lottery mode related to the next winning lottery is the low probability mode.

  According to this, when the winning result of the player is displayed, it may be determined whether the next lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode depending on the design at the time of winning the winning lottery. Can increase the degree of attention.

  In the second embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed and the lottery game is executed 100 times, the lottery mode related to the winning lottery is always the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. . For this reason, after the lottery game has been executed 100 times after the opening / closing execution mode has ended, the player basically makes a left turn so that the game ball wins the first start opening 56, The game is continued while expecting that one lottery game will win and win the lottery. In this case, when the winning lottery is won, the distribution table for the first result display unit is referred to, and since the winning result in the low probability mode is obtained, the frequency of the high frequency support mode is 100 times. Therefore, when the lottery is won 100 times or more after the opening / closing execution mode ends (when the winning is the first time), the symbol display device 80 may display 100 times as the remaining number from the beginning.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the distribution table may be changed. For example, according to the lottery mode when the distribution table is referred to, the end condition for the high frequency support mode may be set not as one type but as two types or even a plurality of types. For example, when the lottery mode when the distribution table for the first result display unit is referred to is the high probability mode, the end condition of the high frequency support mode is selected not 100 times but 100 times. You may make it happen. Further, the end condition to be set can be changed as appropriate.

  In the second embodiment, not only the effect corresponding to the lottery mode is displayed during the high-frequency support mode, but also the next hit during the round of the opening / closing execution mode that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode. An effect suggesting a lottery mode related to the lottery may be displayed. For example, a character or the like may be displayed in a predetermined round, and the lottery mode in the next high frequency support mode may be suggested by the displayed character.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is such that the lottery mode related to the winning lottery may shift (fall) from the high probability mode to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode as compared to the second embodiment. Others are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  First, problems (problems) in the second embodiment will be described. That is, in the second embodiment, when a winning lottery is won, depending on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80, whether the winning result is a 15R normal winning result or a 15R probability changing winning game To make it difficult for people to grasp.

  However, in the first result display section 76a, a variable display relating to the first lottery game is performed, and when the first lottery game is a winning result, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed (lighted). ) That is, in the first result display section 76a, if the first lottery game is a 15R normal hit result, a stop result corresponding to the 15R normal hit result is displayed. The corresponding stop result is displayed. That is, in the first result display section 76a, different stop results are displayed for the case of the 15 normal hit result and the case of the 15R normal hit result.

  Similarly, in the second result display section 76b, a variable display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and when the second lottery game is a winning result, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed (lighted). ) That is, in the second result display portion 76b, if the second lottery game is a 15R normal hit result, a stop result corresponding to the 15R normal hit result is displayed. The corresponding stop result is displayed. That is, in the second result display portion 76b, different stop results are displayed for the case of the 15 normal hit result and the case of the 15R normal hit result.

  For this reason, when a player who is familiar with the game confirms the stop result of the first result display section 76a or the second result display section 76b when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Thus, it is possible to accurately grasp whether the hit result is a 15R normal hit result or a 15R probability change hit result. That is, the lottery mode related to the winning result after the opening / closing execution mode can be accurately grasped, and the gaming method that is most advantageous to the player can always be selected. Therefore, there is a significant difference in the number of high-frequency support modes given after the opening / closing execution mode ends between a player who is familiar with the game and a player who is not familiar with the game. The feeling of unfairness among people increases. In addition, there is a possibility that the gameability of allowing the player to continue the game while guessing the lottery mode is impaired.

  The present embodiment solves such a problem, and when the mode is the high probability mode, the mode may shift (fall) to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode.

  First, the configuration of the main RAM 114 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of main controller 91. As shown in FIG. 57, the main ROM 113 is provided with a fall / fail table storage area 113m in addition to the various areas 113a to 113k. In the fall success / failure table storage area 113m, a fall success / failure table used in the fall lottery is stored.

  Next, the configuration of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the main MPU 112 uses a fall random number counter C5 in addition to the various counters C1, C2, C3, CINI1, CS, C4, and CINI2. For example, the falling random number counter C5 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). The falling random number counter C5 is updated at an interval of 4 msec which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. The predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, or the second special start port 58 is held in the special symbol in the main RAM 114. It is sequentially stored in the sphere storage area 114b. The falling random number counter C5 is provided in various other counter areas 114p of the main RAM 114.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the first reserved area RA1 is provided with a fall random number counter storage area 205 in addition to the various storage areas 201-204. Note that the configurations of the second to eighth reserved areas RA2 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are not particularly illustrated, but a falling random number counter storage area 205 is provided as in FIG. In the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8, various counters C1 to C3 are selected in accordance with the winning history of game balls to the first start port 56, the first special start port 57, and the second special start port 58. (Values of the lottery counter buffer 114a) are stored in the various storage areas 201 to 203, and the value of the fall random number counter C5 (the value of the fall random number counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is the fall random number counter. It is stored in the storage area 205.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of falling lottery, the value of random numbers (that is, the winning information) that wins the falling lottery (that is, the result of falling) is 18. In the present embodiment, in the falling lottery, a table to be referenced is shared regardless of the game modes such as the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference table may be switched according to the gaming state.

  When the winning lottery is won, as will be described later, the lottery mode related to the winning lottery shifts (falls) from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In the low probability mode, the low probability mode is maintained regardless of the value of the fall random number counter C5.

  Next, the special figure variation start process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. This process is basically the same process as the special figure variation start process described with reference to FIG. 25, and is a process in which a fall determination process or the like (S722 to S724) is added.

  Specifically, in the special figure change start process, after the data setting process in step 702 is executed, a fall determination process is executed (S722). In the fall determination process, with reference to the fall success / failure table stored in the fall success / failure table storage area 113m of the main ROM 113, the information for fall fall out of the information stored in the execution area RC, that is, the numerical value related to the fall random number counter C5. It is determined whether the information (numerical information stored in the falling random number counter storage area 205) matches the falling numerical information.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall determination process is a fall winning result (S723). If it is determined that the result is a fall winning result (S723: YES), if the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f, the high probability mode flag is deleted (S724). Thereby, the lottery mode related to the winning lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode. Even if the winning lottery is won, the first result display portion 76a or the second result displaying portion 76b does not display a stop result indicating that the falling lottery has been won. Thereafter, the numerical value of the high probability mode number counter is cleared to 0 (S725).

  After clearing the high-probability mode number counter to 0, or when it is determined that the winning is not a fall winning (S723: NO), the processing after step 703 is executed in order and the special figure variation start processing is terminated.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a probability change result, and even if the high probability mode is immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the special figure change start process (FIG. 60). ) Is executed, the high probability mode may shift to the low probability mode (fall) without going through the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, even if the player has accurately grasped that the winning result that has caused the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a probability change result, the player actually performs step 703 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 60). It is difficult to accurately grasp the lottery mode at the time of the determination process. For this reason, it is possible to suppress an unfair feeling between a player who is familiar with the game and a player who is not familiar with the game. In other words, it is possible to suppress a difference in game characteristics between a player who is familiar with the game and a player who is not familiar with the game.

  Further, by allowing the player to fall from the high probability mode to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode, the player can easily focus on the effects displayed on the symbol display device 80. For this reason, the degree of attention to the player's performance can be improved, and consequently the interest in the gaming machine can be improved.

(Modification of the third embodiment)
A modification of the third embodiment will be described. For example, in the third embodiment, the stay mode when the lottery game is executed to the player by shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode. The configuration that is difficult to grasp has been described. However, when the winning result is the normal winning result, the player who is familiar with the game can accurately grasp the stop result display on the first result display unit 76a or the second result display unit 76b. When the result is a normal 15R hit result, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode, and the low probability mode does not shift to the high probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, in the case of a 15R normal hit result, a player who is familiar with the game is still more advantageous. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the probability of the 15R probability variation result is increased, for example, the probability of the 15R probability variation result is 90%, and the probability of the 15R normal variation result is 10%. Also good. According to this, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the mode related to the winning lottery is often started from the high probability mode, and even for the player who is familiar with the game, the mode related to the actual winning lottery is accurately set. It becomes difficult to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of unfairness between a player who is familiar with the game and a player who is not familiar with the game.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency when the first lottery game wins the winning lottery and when the second lottery game wins the winning lottery. This is a change to the end condition of support mode. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the main RAM 114 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of main controller 91. As shown in FIG. 61, the main-side RAM 114 has one short-time mode number counter instead of the first short-time mode number counter area 114h, the second short-time mode number counter area 114i, and the total short-time mode number counter area 114j. An area 114u is provided.

  Next, the distribution table of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62A and 62B are diagrams for explaining the distribution table, in which FIG. 62A is a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit, and FIG. 62B is a table for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (2nd distribution information group).

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 62A, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 14” is allocated as the game result distribution result. "Is a result per 4R normal," 15-19 "is a result per 15R normal, and" 20-29 "is a result per 15R probability variation. In addition, when the win type counter C2 is “0 to 19” (in the case of a normal win result), the number of times that the lottery game is executed is set to 100 as the end condition of the high frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 4” is shown as the game result. The result is 4R normal hit, "5-19" is the 15 normal hit result, and "20-29" is the 15R probability change hit result. In addition, when the win type counter C2 is “0 to 19” (in the case of a normal win result), the number of times that the lottery game is executed is set to 50 as an end condition of the high frequency support mode.

  That is, in this embodiment, the probability of a 15R normal hit result is higher in the distribution table for the second result display unit than in the distribution table for the first result display unit. On the other hand, the number of lottery games executed until the high frequency support mode ends is smaller in the distribution table for the second result display unit than in the distribution table for the first result display unit. That is, when a game ball wins the first start opening 56 and the first special start opening 57 and wins the winning lottery, the game ball wins the second special start opening 58 and wins the winning lottery. The probability of a 15R normal hit result is low, but the number of lottery games executed before the next high-frequency support mode ends is increased. In other words, when a game ball wins the first starting port 56 and the first special starting port 57 and wins the winning lottery, the game ball wins the second special starting port 58 and wins the winning lottery. However, although the number of prize balls expected in the opening / closing execution mode is small, the probability of winning the winning lottery again in the next high-frequency support mode increases.

  In the following description, the 4R normal hit result is the 4R normal hit result A, the 15R normal hit result is 15R normal hit result A, and the 15R probability change in the hit result sorted with reference to the distribution table for the first result display section. The hit result is also referred to as a 15R probability change hit result A. In addition, the 4R normal hit result is 4R normal hit result B, the 15R normal hit result is 15R normal hit result B, and the 15R probability per hit change result is the hit result assigned with reference to the distribution table for the second result display section. It is also called the result B per 15R probability variation. The number of times of end conditions of the 4R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result A, 4R normal hit result B, and 15R normal hit result B is stored in the time reduction mode count storage area 113f of the main ROM 113. .

  Next, the special figure variation start process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. This process is basically the same process as the special figure change start process described with reference to FIG. 25, and the short-time mode flag is stored with respect to the special figure change start process described with reference to FIG. The process is changed to the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction mode number counter (S726).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63, when it is determined in step 712 that the time reduction mode flag is stored (S712: YES), the time reduction mode number counter is decremented by 1 (S726). Note that the specified number of times is set in the time reduction mode number counter after the ending time of the opening / closing execution mode resulting from the 4R normal hit result or the 15R normal hit result has elapsed (FIG. 65, S1312).

  In the flag storing process in step 707, the various hit result flag storage area 114n stores the 4R normal hit result flag A in the case of the 4R normal hit result A, and in the case of the 15R normal hit result A. The 15R normal hit result flag A is stored, and if it is the 15R probability change result A, the 15R probability change result flag A is stored. In the case of 4R normal hit result B, the 4R normal hit result flag B is stored. In the case of 15R normal hit result B, the 15R normal hit result flag B is stored. Stores the 15R probability variation result flag B.

  Next, the special figure determining process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process. This process is basically the same process as the special figure finalizing process described with reference to FIG. 27 described above, and when the time reduction mode flag is stored with respect to the special figure finalizing process described with reference to FIG. The process is changed to the process of determining the value of the time reduction mode number counter (S920).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, when it is determined that the time reduction mode flag is stored (S905: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction mode number counter is 1 or more (S920). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction mode number counter is not 1 or more (S920: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction mode number counter is 0, the time reduction mode flag is deleted (S908). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction mode number counter is 1 or more (S920: YES), the processing of step 910 is executed and the processing for determining the special figure is ended.

  Next, the special power ending process executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special electricity ending process executed by the main MPU 112. This process is basically the same process as the special electric power end process described with reference to FIG. 31, and in contrast to the special electric power end process described with reference to FIG. In this process, the number of times is set (S1312).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined that the result is not the probability variation result (S1302: NO), the high probability mode flag is deleted (S1304), and the short time mode flag is stored (S1305). Then, after setting the number of time reduction modes in the time reduction mode number counter (S1312), the processing after step 1307 is executed and the special electric power termination processing is terminated.

  In the process of setting the time-saving mode number in the time-saving mode number counter in step 1312, the time-saving mode number is referred to the time-saving mode number storage area 113f of the main ROM 113 based on the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114n. Is set (S1311). Specifically, when the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the 4R normal hit result flag A (when the result is 4R normal hit result A), or when the flag is the 15 normal hit result flag A ( When the result is 15R normal hit result A), 100 is set in the time reduction mode number counter (see FIG. 62, 4R normal hit result A, 15R normal hit result A). Further, when the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114n is the 4R normal hit result flag B (when the result is 4R normal hit result B), or when the flag is the 15 normal hit result flag B (15R normal hit) In the case of result B), 50 is set in the time reduction mode number counter (see FIG. 62, 4R normal result B, 15R normal result B).

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the symbol display device 80 displays a combination of the same symbols on any of the active lines L1 to L5. The display mode is such that the type of can be clearly understood. Specifically, if the result is a 15R probability variation result, an odd symbol combination is displayed on any one of the effective lines L1 to L5, and if the result is a 4R normal result, any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is displayed. The combination of “2” symbol or “4” symbol is displayed on one of them, and if it is a 15R normal hit result, “6” symbol or “8” symbol is displayed on any one of the effective lines L1 to L5. The combination of is displayed.

  In addition, during the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming method in the high frequency support mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the characters “Aim at arrow A may increase the number of time-saving modes !?” and a corresponding image are displayed, and a game is displayed at the first special start port 57. It suggests that the number of short-time modes increases by winning the ball. In addition, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the text “The probability of winning 15 when the arrow B (outside region R2) is aimed at! Will increase!” And a corresponding image are displayed, and the second special start It is suggested that the probability of a result per 15R is increased by winning a game ball in the mouth 58. Thereby, the player can grasp the gameability that a different result can be generated by changing the manner of launching the game ball.

  Next, a gaming method in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.

  In the high frequency support mode, the player strikes the game ball to the right so that the game ball wins at the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the player can continue the game without significantly reducing the ball.

  At this time, in the high frequency support mode, a game ball can be awarded to either the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58, but as described above, the first special start port 57 has a game. When the ball wins and wins the winning lottery, the probability of a 15R normal winning result is lower than when the game ball wins the second special start port 58 and wins the winning lottery. The number of lottery games to be executed before the high-frequency support mode ends is increased. In other words, when a game ball wins at the second special start port 58 and wins the winning lottery, the result is 15R normal win than when the game ball wins the first special start port 57 and wins the win lottery. However, the number of lottery games that are executed before the end of the next high-frequency support mode is reduced.

  For this reason, the player places emphasis on the number of game balls (rounds) obtained in one opening / closing execution mode, or the number of times the next high-frequency support mode ends (number of time-short modes, ease of success) Depending on whether or not the emphasis is placed on the game, the player can select the playability by the player himself. For this reason, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the player places an emphasis on the number of game balls (number of rounds) obtained in one opening / closing execution mode, or the number of times the high-frequency support mode ends (number of short-time modes, easy to hit continuously) Depending on whether or not the emphasis is on, the player can select the gameability by himself / herself. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the player himself can select the game property according to the player's preference. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
A modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution table may be changed. For example, in the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the end condition for the high frequency support mode is not one type, but two types or more types are set. Also good. In addition, 50 times may be selected as an end condition for high-frequency support in the result A per 4R and the result A per 15R, and the high-frequency support mode is used in the result B per normal 4R and the result per 15R normal. The end condition of 100 may be selected 100 times.

  In addition, for example, when the winning result that caused the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a 15R normal winning result, the “2” symbol or “4” symbol combination is displayed in the previous game round, and during the opening / closing execution mode, You may make it display the effect for making a player recognize that it is a 15R normal hit result. Similarly, in the case of a 15R probability variation result, an even number of symbol combinations are displayed in the immediately preceding game round, and an effect for causing the player to recognize that the result is a 15R probability variation result is displayed during the opening / closing execution mode. It may be.

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the manner in which the game ball is guided to the variable ordinary winning device 59, and is otherwise the same as the first embodiment. Description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, above the variable ordinary winning device 59 (the area until the game ball reaches the variable ordinary winning device 59), there is an allocating unit (allocating means, external allocating device). Means) 220 is arranged. Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the sorting unit 220.

  As shown in FIG. 68, when the game ball reaches the distribution unit 220, the distribution unit 220 distributes the discharge destination of the game ball to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2, and the passive distribution member (Distributing member) 221 and a plurality of passive sorting devices 223 having branching wall portions 222 are provided.

  In this embodiment, the passive sorting member 221 has rod-shaped first to third protruding pieces 224 to 226 extending in one direction, and the first to third protruding pieces 224 to 226 are shaft portions 227. As shown in the figure, the shaft portion 227 is substantially Y-shaped in front view so as to be equiangularly spaced from each other. The shaft portion 227 is attached to the game board 43 so that the shaft portion 227 can be rotated about the shaft. In addition, the passive sorting member 221 includes a first accommodating portion (first passive portion) 228 capable of receiving a game ball at a portion between the first protruding piece 224 and the second protruding piece 225, and the first A second accommodating portion (second passive portion) 229 capable of receiving a game ball is formed at a portion between the first protruding piece 224 and the third protruding piece 226. Then, when the passive sorting member 221 receives the game ball in the first housing portion 228 or the second housing portion 229, the passive sorting member 221 rotates around the shaft portion 227 depending on the weight of the game ball, and moves the game ball to the inner region R1 or Sort (guide) to the outer region R2. In addition, as for the passive distribution member 221, the rotation limit position is prescribed | regulated by the wall part 222 for branch so that it may mention later.

  The branching wall portion 222 is disposed immediately below the shaft portion 227 and extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the branching wall portion 222 is disposed between the second projecting piece 225 and the third projecting piece 226, and when the passive sorting member 221 rotates, the second projecting piece 225 or the third projecting piece 225 is rotated. It arrange | positions so that the further rotation of the passive distribution member 221 may be suppressed by contact | abutting with the protrusion piece 226. FIG. That is, the branching wall portion 222 functions as a stopper that defines the rotation limit position of the passive sorting member 221. In the present embodiment, when the passive sorting member 221 is rotated, the second protruding piece 225 is disposed so that the second protruding piece 225 comes into contact with the branch wall portion 222 from the right side when viewed from the front (on the outer rail 54 side). 226 is arranged so as to abut on the branching wall portion 222 from the left side in the front view (the symbol display device 80 side). That is, when the passive distribution member 221 receives the game ball by the first housing portion 228, the passive distribution member 221 rotates clockwise (second circumferential direction) to guide the game ball to the outer region R2, and the game ball is moved to the second region. When it is received by the storage portion 229, it is arranged to rotate counterclockwise (first circumferential direction) and guide the game ball to the inner region R1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a passive sorting member side magnet 224 a is provided at the tip of the first projecting piece 224 opposite to the shaft portion 227, and the first projecting piece 224 is provided behind the game board 43. When the extending direction is the vertical direction when viewed from the front, the base-side magnet 230 is provided at a position corresponding to the passive sorting member-side magnet 224a. In this embodiment, the rotation regulating means is configured by the passive sorting member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230.

  The passive sorting member-side magnet 224a and the base-side magnet 230 are each in the shape of a rod, and the polarity of the passive sorting member-side magnet 224a on the base-side magnet 230 side and the passive sorting-member-side magnet 224a on the base-side magnet 230 are set. It arrange | positions so that it may become the polarity (S poles or N poles) which repels mutually.

  Thereby, the position where the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other) is the case where the first projecting piece 224 is located immediately above the shaft portion 227. Since the passive distribution member-side magnet 224a and the base-side magnet 230 are arranged to have the same polarity (S poles or N poles), the first projecting piece 224 is rebounded so that the first protruding piece 224 is the shaft portion 227. It is possible to suppress the stop immediately above. That is, it can be maintained in a state where the first housing portion 228 or the second housing portion 229 is opened upward (a state rotated in the first circumferential direction or the second circumferential direction). For this reason, when the game ball reaches the passive sorting member 221, the game ball is alternately received by the first storage unit 228 or the second storage unit 229 and is alternately discharged to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2.

  The above is the configuration of the passive sorting device 223. And in this embodiment, as FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 show, the two passive distribution apparatuses 223 are continuously provided so that it may become lower front view. Specifically, each of the passive sorting devices 223 is arranged such that when the game balls are distributed to the outer region R2 side by the upstream (previous) passive sorting device 223 in the flow direction of the game balls, It is arranged so as to be received by either the first accommodation part 228 or the second accommodation part 229 of the passive sorting member 221 in the passive sorting device 223 on the side (rear stage).

  When the opening / closing plate 59b is in the open state, the variable ordinary winning device 59 wins the game balls distributed to the inner region R1 into the left space K1, and the game balls distributed to the outer region R2 to the right space K2. Is arranged to win a prize.

  Next, a game ball distribution operation in the distribution unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the passive sorting member 221 is maintained in a state where the first housing portion 228 or the second housing portion 229 is opened upward by the passive sorting member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230. In FIG. 69A, the passive passive member 221 on the upstream side and the passive passive member 221 on the downstream side are illustrated in a state where the first accommodating portion 228 is opened upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the upstream passive sorting member 221, the passive sorting member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227. Then, by guiding the game ball to the outer region R2 side, the game ball is guided to the downstream passive sorting member 221. The upstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the second housing portion 229 opened upward after guiding the game ball to the outer region R2 side.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the downstream passive sorting member 221, the passive sorting member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227 as an axis. Then, the game ball is guided to the outer region R2 side. Thereby, the game ball wins from the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a if the opening / closing plate 59b is in the open state, and moves to the second special start opening 58 side if the opening / closing plate 59b is in the closed state. Be guided. In addition, after guiding the game ball to the outer side region R2 side, the downstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the second housing portion 229 opened upward.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), when the game ball is guided to the upstream passive sorting member 221, in FIG. 69 (a), the passive sorting member 221 has the second storage portion 229. Since it stops in the state opened upwards, a game ball is received by the 2nd accommodating part 229, and when the passive distribution member 221 rotates, it is guide | induced to the inner side area | region R1 side. That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the downstream passive sorting member 221. Thereby, the game ball wins from the left space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a if the opening / closing plate 59b is in an open state, and moves toward the first special start opening 57 if the opening / closing plate 59b is in a closed state. Be guided. In addition, after guiding the game ball to the inner region R1 side, the upstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the first housing portion 228 opened upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), when the game ball is guided to the upstream passive sorting member 221, the passive sorting member 221 has the first accommodating portion 228 in the upward direction in FIG. 69 (d). Therefore, the game ball is guided to the outer region R2 side as in FIG. 69 (a). The upstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the second housing portion 229 opened upward after guiding the game ball to the outer region R2 side.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (f), when the game ball is guided to the downstream passive sorting member 221, the passive sorting member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229 in FIG. 69 (c). Since it stops in the state opened upwards, a game ball is received by the 2nd accommodating part 229, and the passive distribution member 221 rotates and is guide | induced to the inner side area | region R1 side. Thereby, the game ball wins from the left space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a if the opening / closing plate 59b is in an open state, and moves toward the first special start opening 57 if the opening / closing plate 59b is in a closed state. Be guided. The downstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the second housing portion 229 opened upward after guiding the game ball to the inner region R1 side.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (g), when the game ball is guided to the upstream passive sorting member 221, the passive sorting member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229 upward in FIG. 69 (e). Therefore, the game ball is guided to the inner region R1 side as in FIG. 69 (d). Thereby, the game ball wins from the left space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a if the opening / closing plate 59b is in an open state, and moves toward the first special start opening 57 if the opening / closing plate 59b is in a closed state. Be guided. The upstream passive sorting member 221 stops with the second housing portion 229 opened upward after guiding the game ball to the inner region R1 side. That is, when the distribution operation of FIG. 69 (g) is executed, the state returns to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  As described above, in the sorting unit 220 having the two passive sorting devices 223 shown in FIG. 69, four sort paths (two squares) are configured. Of the four game balls, three game balls win the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a when the open / close plate 59b is open, and the first special ball when the open / close plate 59b is closed. It is guided to the start port 57. Also, one of the four game balls is won in the right space K2 of the normal winning opening 59a when the open / close plate 59b is open, and the second special ball is used when the open / close plate 59b is closed. It is guided to the start port 58.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  That is, in this embodiment, when a player hits a game ball to the right, the game ball is distributed to either the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 by the distribution unit 220. For this reason, the player can distribute the game balls to the inner region R1 and the outer region R2 without changing the manner of launching the game balls. In other words, the player can win a game ball in the left space K1 and the right space K2 of the normal winning port 59a without changing the manner of launching the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls can be distributed by the passive distribution member 221 common to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which guides a game ball to the inner side area | region R1 side or the member which guides a game ball to the outer side area | region R2 side is provided separately, the number of parts can be reduced.

  In addition, a plurality of passive sorting members 221 (passive sorting devices 223) are provided, and when the game ball is guided from the upstream passive sorting member 221 to the outer region R2, the downstream passive sorting member 221 has A game ball is guided. For this reason, by appropriately changing the number of passive sorting members 221 to be arranged, the number of distribution paths of the game balls can be easily changed (assuming the number of passive sorting members 221 is n) When the player hits the game ball to the right, the ratio of the game balls passing through the inner region R1 and the outer region R2 can be easily changed according to the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the sorting unit 220 has a rotation restricting means constituted by the passive sorting member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230, the first housing portion 228 and the second housing portion 229 are game balls. It is suppressed that it rotates after receiving and before receiving a game ball next. That is, turning without receiving the game ball is suppressed. For this reason, the malfunction that a game ball will be induced | guided | derived to inner side area | region R1 or outer side area | region R2 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 by the distribution unit 220. Then, in the sorting unit 220 (passive sorting device 223), it is determined whether the game ball is to be sorted to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 depending on the stop position when the game ball is sorted (see FIG. 69). That is, the player can grasp whether the game ball is distributed to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 by confirming the stop position of the distribution unit 220. For this reason, for example, when the player does not want to win the game ball at the second special start port 58, when the game ball is distributed to the outer region R2 by the sorting unit 220, the game ball is won at the normal winning port 59a. The second non-electric player 67 may not be opened, or a game ball may be won in the normal winning port 59a so that the game ball is not guided to the second special start port 58. In other words, in the present embodiment, the player is made to grasp (guess) whether the game ball is distributed to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2, and change the manner of launching the game ball based on the grasped result. Can be added, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, only one passive sorting device 223 may be provided, and the game balls may be alternately distributed to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2. Moreover, the distribution unit 220 may be configured to include three or more passive distribution devices 223. That is, the number of the passive sorting devices 223 included in the sorting unit 220 can be changed as appropriate according to the game machine to be applied.

  In the fifth embodiment, the number of paths distributed by the distribution unit 220 may be three instead of two of the inner region R1 and the outer region R2. For example, when it is distributed to the inner region R1 by the upstream passive distribution member 221 (see FIG. 69 (d) and FIG. 69 (g)), it passes through the left side of the front view from the normal winning opening 59a. Only when the downstream passive sorting member 221 is assigned to the inner region R1 (see FIG. 69 (f)), it may be possible to win the left space K1 of the normal winning opening 59a. According to this, since the probability that the game ball can win the left space K1 and the probability that the game space can win the right space K2 are equal, it can be suppressed that only one of the non-electric actors is easily opened.

  Furthermore, in the said 5 embodiment, the part provided with the distribution unit 220 is provided with the distribution unit which has a drive part driven with the control signal from the main control apparatus 91, and the said distribution unit is random or period The game balls may be distributed to the inner region R1 or the outer region R2 every time.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, it is comprised by the part provided with the distribution unit 220 with the dish-shaped accessory in which the two holes were formed as a distribution means (external distribution means), for example. When the game ball is discharged from one hole, the game ball is distributed to the inner region R1, and when the game ball is discharged from the other hole, the game ball is distributed to the outer region R2. You may do it.

  In the fifth embodiment, the distribution table (FIG. 17) may be changed. That is, in the fifth embodiment, when the player strikes the game ball to the right, the game ball is more easily distributed to the inner region R1 than to the outer region R2. That is, when the player hits the game ball to the right, the game ball is easier to win from the left space K1 than the right space K2 of the normal winning port 59a, and is guided to the first special start port 57 rather than the second special start port 58. It is easy to be done. For this reason, in the allocation table, for example, as the time reduction mode B, the number of times the first lottery game defined as the end condition A is executed may be 60 times so that the time reduction mode does not end too early. .

  Furthermore, in the said 5th Embodiment, as demonstrated in the modification of the said 1st Embodiment, you may make it the 1st non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 be in an open state, when a some game ball contacts. . In this case, in the fifth embodiment, since the sorting unit 220 has the two passive sorting devices 223, when the player hits the game ball to the right, three of the four games The balls are distributed to the inner region R1, and one of the four game balls is distributed to the outer region R2. That is, in the said 5th Embodiment, it is set as the structure in which the 1st non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 contacts a game ball more easily than the 2nd non-electric actor operating mechanism 71. For this reason, for example, when three game balls come into contact with one non-electric actor operating mechanism 70, the first non-electric actor 66 is opened, so that only one non-electric actor is open. It is possible not to become easily.

(Sixth embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, a partition member 59d is not provided in the normal winning opening 59a, but one discharge passage and one operation trigger means are provided in the first embodiment. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the partition member 59d is not provided in the normal winning opening 59a. A single common discharge passage 77 communicates with the normal winning opening 59a, and the common discharge passage 77 is shared with a common non-electric component operating mechanism (common non-electric component operation trigger means) 78. A common discharge passage detection sensor (main detection means) 77 a is provided on the downstream side of the non-electric actor operating mechanism 78.

  In the present embodiment, the first non-electric actor 66, the second non-electric actor 67, and the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78 are such that the game ball contacts (enters) the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78. Thus, both the first non-electric component 66 and the second non-electric component 67 are arranged in an open state.

  Next, the non-electric player state grasping process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a non-electric actor state grasping process. This process is basically the same process as the non-electric actor state grasping process described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, and is different from the non-electric actor state grasping process described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. The process is changed to the process (S2301) for determining whether or not the game ball is discharged from the common discharge passage 77.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the common discharge passage 77 based on the detection result of the common discharge passage detection sensor 77a (S2301). Note that the passage of the game ball is detected by the common discharge passage detection sensor 77a means that the game ball comes into contact with the common non-electric player operating mechanism 78 and the first non-electric player 66 and the second non-electric player. This means that the object 67 is in an open state (maintained in the open state), and two game balls can be won in the first special start port 57 and the second special start port 58.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the common discharge passage 77 (S2301: YES), 2 is set in the first start winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S303), An object release command is set as an output target (S304). Further, 2 is set in the second start winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S305), and the second non-electric player release command is set as an output target (S306). Thereafter, the processing from step 401 onward is executed, and this non-electric utility state grasping processing is terminated.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, the first non-electric component 66 and the second non-electric component 67 are opened by one common non-electric component operating mechanism 78. For this reason, the number of parts can be reduced. Even if the first non-electric actor 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are opened by one common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78 as in this embodiment, the player Since the game ball can be selectively guided to the first special start port 57 or the second special start port 58 by firing the game ball aiming at the region R1 or the outer region R2, the same as in the first embodiment. The effect of can be obtained.

  Further, since the first non-electric actor 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are opened by the single non-electric actor operating mechanism 78, the player can easily make the first special start port 57 or the second A game ball can be awarded to the special start port 58. For this reason, it can suppress that a player recognizes that the game nature which makes a special starting port win a game ball after making a non-electric actor open state is troublesome.

(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
A modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the common discharge passage 77 may be provided with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 and the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 instead of the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78. Good. That is, it is good also as a structure provided with two different non-electric actor operating mechanisms in one discharge passage. Even in such a configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, when the game ball won in the normal winning port 59a is discharged from the common discharge passage 77, the game ball is removed from the first non-electric player operating mechanism 70 and Since the first non-electric actor 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are both in an open state in contact with the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71, a special after the player has made the non-electric actor open. Recognizing that the gameability of winning a game ball at the start opening is troublesome can be suppressed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described in the modification of the first embodiment, the plurality of game balls come into contact with the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78 and the first non-electric actor 66 and the first (2) The non-electric player 67 may be in an open state.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described in the modification of the first embodiment, a detection sensor (sub-detecting means) is also arranged on the upstream side of the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78, and a normal prize is awarded. You may make it determine whether the game ball won to the opening | mouth 59a and the number of game balls discharged | emitted from the common discharge channel | path 77 correspond.

(Seventh embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a plurality of partition members 59d are provided in the normal winning opening 59a, and the other parts are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the normal winning opening 59a is provided with three partition members 59d. Specifically, the three partition members 59d have a first left-side space K1a, a second left-side space K1b, a first right-side space K2a, and a second right-side space in order from the left side in the normal winning opening 59a in front view. It is fixed and provided so as to be divided into four spaces K2b. In addition, compared with the first embodiment, a partition member 59d is added to the normal winning opening 59a so as to divide the left space K1 in the first embodiment into a first left space K1a and a second left space K1b. In addition, it can be said that a partition member 59d is added so as to divide the right space K2 in the first embodiment into a first right space K2a and a second right space K2b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, four discharge passages 68-1, 68-2, 69-1, and 69-2 are disposed so as to communicate with the normal winning port 59a. Specifically, the first left discharge passage 68-1 is disposed so as to discharge the winning game balls in the first left space K1a, and the second so as to discharge the winning game balls in the second left space K1b. A left discharge passage 68-2 is disposed, a first right discharge passage 69-1 is disposed so as to discharge a game ball won in the first right space K2a, and a game ball won in the second right space K2b is disposed. A second right discharge passage 69-2 is arranged to discharge. As compared with the first embodiment, the left discharge passage 68 has a first left discharge passage 68-1 and a second left discharge passage 68-2, and the right discharge passage 69 is a first right discharge passage. It can be said that it has 69-1 and the 2nd right side discharge passage 69-2.

  The first left discharge passage 68-1 is provided with a first non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member (first operation trigger means constituent member) 70a, and the second left discharge passage 68-2 includes A 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member (first operating trigger means constituent member) 70b is provided. The 1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a and the 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b are mechanically connected to the first non-electric actor 66, and the 1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b. When a specified number (in this embodiment, one) of game balls contact (enter) the first and second non-electric actor actuating mechanism component members 70a and the first-second non-electric actor actuating mechanism component member 70b. The object 66 is opened (maintained open). That is, in the present embodiment, the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism 70 that opens the first non-electric actor 66 is the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent member 70a and the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism 70a. It can be said that it is set as the structure which has the accessory operating mechanism structural member 70b.

  Similarly, the first right discharge passage 69-1 is provided with a 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member (second operation trigger means constituent member) 71a, and the second right discharge passage 69-2 has a second right discharge passage 69-2. The 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member (second operating trigger means constituent member) 71b is provided. The 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71a and the 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71b are mechanically connected to the second non-electric actor 67, and the 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71b. When the specified number (in this embodiment, one) of game balls comes into contact (enters a ball) with the accessory actuating mechanism constituent member 71a and the 2-2 non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent member 71b, the second non-electric player The object 67 is opened (maintained open). In other words, in the present embodiment, the second non-electric actor actuating mechanism 71 that opens the second non-electric actor 67 is the 2-1 non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituting member 71a and the second 2-2 non-electric actor. It can be said that it is set as the structure which has the accessory operating mechanism structural member 71b.

  Further, the first left discharge passage 68-1 is provided with a first left discharge passage detection sensor 68a1 on the downstream side of the first non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 70a, and the second left discharge passage 68-. 2, a second left-side discharge passage detection sensor 68a2 is disposed on the downstream side of the first-second non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b. In the first right discharge passage 69-1, a first right discharge passage detection sensor 69a1 is disposed on the downstream side of the 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71a, and the second right discharge passage 69-2 is connected to the first right discharge passage 69-1. The second right discharge passage detection sensor 69a2 is disposed on the downstream side of the 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, an area (upstream side of the variable normal winning device 59) until the player reaches the variable normal winning device 59 when the player hits the game ball to the right is Three partition mechanisms 72 are provided. Specifically, the three partition mechanisms 72 include a first inner region R1a that guides the game ball to the first left space K1a side in the normal winning port 59a when the player hits the game ball to the right, and the normal winning port. The second inner region R1b for guiding the game ball to the second left space K1b side in 59a, the first outer region R2a for guiding the game ball to the first right space K2a side in the normal winning port 59a, and the normal winning port 59a A second outer region R2b that guides the game ball is arranged on the second right space K2b side so as to partition the second outer region R2b. That is, when the opening / closing plate 59b is in the open state, the player can cause the game ball to win in the first left space K1a by firing the game ball aiming at the first inner region R1a. The game ball can be awarded to the second left space K1b by launching the game ball aiming at R1b, and the game ball can be launched into the first right space K2a by firing the game ball aiming at the first outer region R2a. The game ball can be won, and the game ball can be awarded to the second right space K2b by firing the game ball aiming at the second outer region R2b. As compared with the first embodiment, the partition mechanism 72 is provided so as to divide the inner region R1 in the first embodiment into two, and the partition mechanism so as to divide the outer region R2 in the first embodiment into two. It can be said that 72 is provided. In other words, in the present embodiment, the inner region R1 has a first inner region R1a and a second inner region R1b, and the outer region R2 has a first outer region R2a and a second outer region R2b. .

  In the present embodiment, when the player hits the game ball to the right, passing the game ball to the second outer region R2b means that the other first inner region R1a, second inner region R1b, and first outer It is easier than passing the game ball through the region R1a. For this reason, the entrance of the first inner region R1a, the second inner region R1b, and the first outer region R2a (the portion through which the game ball first passes in each region) is the entrance of the second outer region R2b (the second outer region). The opening width is longer (wider) than the portion of R2 where the game ball first passes.

  The configuration of the game board 43 on the downstream side from the variable ordinary winning device 59 is the same as that in the first embodiment. For this reason, when the opening / closing plate 59b is in the closed state, the game balls that have passed through the first inner region R1a and the second inner region R1b are guided to the first special start port 57 side, and the first outer region R2a and the second The game ball that has passed through the outer region R2b is guided to the second special start port 58 side.

  Next, the non-electric player state grasping process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the non-electric actor state grasping process. This process is basically the same process as the non-electric actor state grasping process described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, and is different from the non-electric actor state grasping process described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. When the game ball is discharged from the first left discharge passage 68-1 and the second left discharge passage 68-2, 2 is set in the first start winning counter, and the first right discharge passage 69-1 and the second right discharge are set. When the game ball is discharged from the passage 69-2, the second start winning counter is set to 2 (S2401 to S2412).

  Specifically, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first left discharge passage 68-1 (whether or not the game ball has been won in the first left space K1a of the normal winning opening 59a) (S2401). ), If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first left discharge passage 68-1 (S2401: NO), whether or not the game ball has passed through the second left discharge passage 68-2 (of the normal winning opening 59a) It is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the second left space K1b (S2402). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second left discharge passage 68-2 (S2402: NO), whether or not the game ball has passed through the first right discharge passage 69-1 (in the normal winning opening 59a). It is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the first right space K2a (S2403), and if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first right discharge passage 69-1 (S2403: NO), the second right side It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 69-2 (whether or not the game ball has been won in the second right space K2b of the normal winning port 59a) (S2404). Each determination in steps 2401 to 2404 is determined by the detection results of the respective discharge passage detection sensors 68a1, 68a2, 69a1, and 69a2.

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first left discharge passage 68-1 (S2401: YES), 1 is set in the first left discharge passage passage counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (2405). ). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second left discharge passage 68-2 (S2402: YES), 1 is set in the second left discharge passage passage counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S2406). ). In step 2405 and step 2406, if 1 is already set in the passage counter, it is maintained as it is. After 1 is set in the first left discharge passage passage counter or after 1 is set in the second left discharge passage passage counter, both the first left discharge passage passage counter and the second left discharge passage passage counter are 1. It is determined whether or not (S2407).

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first non-electric actor 66 has both the 1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a and the 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b. When the game ball comes into contact with the game ball, it is in an open state (maintained in the open state). That is, both the first left discharge passage passage counter and the second left discharge passage passage counter being 1 means that the first non-electric component 66 is in an open state (maintained in the open state). ing. In other words, one of the first left discharge passage passage counter and the second left discharge passage passage counter being zero means that the first non-electric component 66 is in a closed state. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first non-electric component 66 is in an open state by determining whether or not both the first left discharge passage passage counter and the second left discharge passage passage counter are 1. .

  If it is determined that both the first left exhaust passage passage counter and the second left exhaust passage passage counter are 1 (S2407: YES), the first left exhaust passage passage counter and the second left exhaust passage passage counter are Both of them are cleared to 0 (S2408), and thereafter, the processing after step 303 is executed, and this non-electric utility state grasping processing is terminated. If it is determined that both the first left-side discharge passage passage counter and the second left-side discharge passage passage counter are not 1 (S2407: NO), the processing after step 401 is executed to perform the non-electricity object state grasping processing. finish.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first right discharge passage 69-1 (S2403: YES), 1 is set in the first right discharge passage passage counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p ( S2409). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second right discharge passage 69-2 (S2404: YES), 1 is set in the second right discharge passage passage counter provided in the other various counter areas 114p (S2410). ). In step 2409 and step 2410, if 1 is already set in the passage counter, it is maintained as it is. Then, after the first right discharge passage passage counter is set to 1 or after the second right discharge passage passage counter is set to 1, both the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter are 1. It is determined whether or not (S2411).

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second non-electric actor 67 includes both the 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71a and the 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71b. When the game ball comes into contact with the game ball, it is in an open state (maintained in the open state). That is, both the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter being 1 mean that the second non-electric component 67 is in an open state (maintained in the open state). ing. In other words, one of the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter being 0 means that the second non-electric component 67 is in a closed state. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second non-electric component 67 is in an open state by determining whether or not both the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter are 1. .

  If it is determined that both the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter are 1 (S2411: YES), the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter are turned on. Both of them are cleared to 0 (S2412), and thereafter, the processing after step 305 is executed, and this non-electric utility state grasping processing is terminated. If it is determined that both the first right discharge passage passage counter and the second right discharge passage passage counter are not 1 (S2411: NO), or it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second right discharge passage 69-2. If it is (S2404: NO), the processing after step 401 is executed, and this non-electric utility state grasping processing is terminated.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the first non-electric actor 66 is released when the game ball comes into contact with the 1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a and the 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b. It is set as the structure which will be in a state (it maintains in an open state). For this reason, in order to open the first non-electric player 66, the player aims at the first inner region R1a and wins a game ball in the first left space K1a, and also sets the second inner region R1b. Aiming to win the game ball in the second left space K2a. Similarly, the second non-electric actor 67 is in an open state when the game ball contacts the 2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71a and the 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituting member 71b ( Maintained in an open state). Therefore, in order to bring the second non-electric player 67 into the open state, the player aims at the first outer region R2a and wins a game ball in the first right space K2a, and sets the second outer region R2b. It is necessary to aim for a game ball in the second right space K2b. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the gameability of changing the method of launching the game ball in order to release one non-electric player, and diversify the gameability.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
A modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, in the seventh embodiment, the first non-electric actor operating mechanism component 70a and the first non-electric actor operating mechanism configuration necessary for the first non-electric actor 66 to be in the open state. The number of game balls in contact with the member 70b can be changed as appropriate according to the game machine to be applied. For example, when two game balls contact the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituting member 70a and one game ball contacts the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituting member 70b, the first The non-electric player 66 may be in an open state. Similarly, the number of game balls that come into contact with the 2-1 non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent member 71a necessary for the second non-electric actor 67 to be in the open state, and the 2-2 non-electric actor operation The number of game balls in contact with the mechanism constituent member 71b can be changed as appropriate. According to this, it is possible to further diversify the game playability and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of discharge passages and a plurality of non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent members may be provided. That is, for example, one non-electric actor may be opened by contacting a game ball with three non-electric actor operating mechanism components, and one non-electric actor is opened. The number of non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent members necessary for the operation can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the number of non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent members required for opening the first non-electric actor 66 and the non-electric actor required for opening the second non-electric actor 67 The number of actuating mechanism constituent members may be different, for example, the number of non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent members required to open the first non-electric actor 66 is two, and the second The number of non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituent members required for opening the non-electric actor 67 may be three.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the space in the normal winning opening 59a is divided into two spaces, a left space K1 and a right space K2, and the discharge passage is divided into a left discharge passage 68 and a left discharge passage 68. The two right discharge passages 69 may be used, and the non-electric actor operating mechanisms may be two non-electric actor operating mechanisms 70 and 71. In this case, for example, when two game balls come into contact with the non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 and one game ball comes into contact with the non-electric actor operating mechanism 71, the non-electric actor 66 is opened, When one game ball comes into contact with the electric player operating mechanism 70 and two game balls come into contact with the non-electric player operating mechanism 71, the non-electric player 67 may be opened. That is, the non-electric actor actuating mechanism that makes two non-electric actors open is shared, and the non-electric actor that is opened changes depending on the number of game balls that contact the non-electric actor operating mechanism. It may be.

  Moreover, in the said 7th Embodiment, you may display on the symbol display apparatus 80 the image which a game ball is not contacting (it does not enter) and the non-electric actor operating mechanism which a player can understand. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, the game ball is in contact with the first non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituting member 70 a on the symbol display device 80, but the first-2 non-electric actor actuating mechanism constituting member 70 b. When the first non-electric player 66 is not in an open state because the game ball is not in contact with the image, an image suggesting that the game ball passes through the second inner region R1b, May be displayed. " Further, although not particularly illustrated, a similar image may be displayed even when the second non-electric player 67 is not in an open state. According to this, the player can clearly grasp the target area, and suppresses disgust that the first non-electric role 66 or the second non-electric role 67 is not open. it can. The displayed image is not limited to this, and can be appropriately changed as long as the player can understand the area to be aimed at.

(Other embodiments)
It is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. And the structure of another following form may be applied individually with respect to the structure in each said embodiment, and may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following another form with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the big prize opening 60a is opened one or more times in a long-time manner, and then It is good also as a structure provided with what is called rank up (RU) opening of the special winning opening 60a once or several times in a short time aspect. Further, after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / raft lottery mode may shift from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, but the support mode may be provided with a hit result that remains the low frequency support mode.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. A configuration that is not included in the hit numerical information in the probability mode may be used.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable prize winning device 60 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly, and stores virtual game media In the configuration having a function, the virtual game medium may be provided.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) relating to the first and second lottery games are not configured to be displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, and are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be provided by setting the movable decorative member as a predetermined notice mode. A predetermined advance light emitting unit) may be turned on to make a hold advance notice, or a hold advance notice may be made by output of sound from the speaker unit 34, or a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. It is good also as a structure by which hold notice is performed by.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both the control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated into the main control device 91, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are integrated into the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 is not configured to control the display control device 93 based on a command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 is set to a voice lamp based on a command output from the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure which controls the control apparatus 92. FIG. Further, the second frame button detection sensor 27a may be connected to the main control device 91.

  (6) The above embodiments may be appropriately combined. For example, when a plurality of game balls come into contact with the first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70 in the modification of the first embodiment, the first non-electric actor 66 is opened, and the second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71 A configuration in which the second non-electric player 67 is opened when a plurality of game balls come into contact with each other may be combined with the second to seventh embodiments. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, when the plurality of game balls come into contact with the common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78, the first non-electric actor 66 and the second non-electric actor 67 are in an open state. Good. In addition, the second and third embodiments are combined with the fourth to seventh embodiments, and the end condition of the high frequency support mode is set in consideration of the lottery mode when winning the winning lottery, and the high probability mode May be limited in number of times. Then, the fourth embodiment is combined with the fifth to seventh embodiments, and the opening / closing execution mode rounds when the first lottery game wins the winning lottery and when the second lottery game wins the winning lottery. The number and the termination condition of the high frequency support mode may be changed. Furthermore, the fifth embodiment may be combined with the seventh embodiment, and a sorting unit 220 may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to change the number of passive sorting devices 223 included in the sorting unit 220 so that the number of sorting paths corresponds to the number of discharge passages. Further, the seventh embodiment is combined with the sixth embodiment to have a configuration having a plurality of discharge passages and a common non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member (common operation trigger means constituent member) provided in each discharge passage. When the game balls come into contact with (enter into) the common non-electric player operating mechanism provided in each discharge passage, the first non-electric player 66 and the second non-electric player 67 are opened. May be.

  (7) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins when the player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

(B) Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment The following describes the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each embodiment described above, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

(1) Feature A group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a bonus gaming mode such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game mode, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is opened and closed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, There has also been proposed a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the privilege game mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-41547). In such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball enters one of the first start port and the second start port until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the bonus game mode ends. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode (high frequency support mode) that is easy.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the player in the game. The feature A group solves this problem.

Feature A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (function to execute the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91),
Grant determination means for performing determination of whether or not the acquired first special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information (special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91 is performed). Function to be executed)
When the predetermined main condition is satisfied, the game ball can enter the normal winning opening (59a), and when the predetermined main condition is not satisfied, the normal winning opening is entered. Normal ball entry means (variable normal prize winning device 59) that makes it difficult or impossible to enter the game ball of
Common operation trigger means (common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78) that makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition by entering the game ball that has entered the normal entry means, or First operation trigger means (first non-electric player operating mechanism 70) and the normal ball entry means that make it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by entering the game ball that has entered the normal ball entry means. A game machine comprising second operation trigger means (second non-electric actor operation mechanism 71) that makes it easy to satisfy the second acquisition condition when the game ball that has entered the ball enters.

  According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters the normal entry means, the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily satisfied when the common operation opportunity means is provided. When the operation trigger means is provided, the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established. For this reason, an action that makes the player easily establish at least one of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition by causing the game ball to enter the normal entry means, and the first acquisition that is easily established. It is possible to give different game characteristics that the condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the common operation trigger means is provided, the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are satisfied when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means and the game ball enters the common operation trigger means. It becomes easy. For this reason, a novel game property that allows the player to select whether to establish the first acquisition condition that is easily established or to establish the second acquisition condition that is easily established by the player's own selection. Can be added and the player's interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, in the configuration provided with a start ball entering portion that is provided in a game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, the “information acquisition means” indicates that “a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. Instead of the configuration of “obtaining special information based on”, a configuration of “acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entering portion” may be adopted.

Feature A2. The first actuation trigger means and the second actuation trigger means;
And at least one sorting means (partitioning member 59d, sorting unit 220) that sorts whether the game ball enters the first action trigger means or the second action trigger means. The gaming machine according to Feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, the game balls are distributed by the distribution means. For this reason, the process of whether the game ball enters the first operation trigger means or the second operation trigger means can be noted, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Feature A3. One of the above-mentioned distribution means is an internal distribution means (partition member 59d) provided in the above-mentioned normal ball entry means, The gaming machine according to feature A3 characterized by things.

  According to the feature A3, the internal distribution means is provided in the normal ball entry means. For this reason, a game area can be utilized widely.

  Feature A4. The game machine according to Feature A3, wherein the internal distribution means is fixed within the normal ball entry means.

  According to feature A4, the internal distribution means is fixed in the normal ball entry means. For this reason, the player enters the game ball into the normal winning opening so as to enter the first operation opportunity means, or enters the game ball into the normal winning opening so as to enter the second operation opportunity means. By selecting whether to make a ball, it is possible to select which of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is to be easily established. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new gameability that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition can be easily established by the player's own selection, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature A5. The internal distribution means is configured such that the game ball that has entered the normal winning opening enters the first operation trigger means or the second action for each predetermined period in the normal entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the gaming machine is movably provided to enter the opportunity means.

  According to feature A5, the player enters the game ball into either the first operation trigger means or the second operation trigger means by selecting a period and firing the game ball so as to enter the normal winning opening. You can choose whether to make a ball. That is, the player can select which of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is easily established by firing the game ball so as to enter the normal winning opening by selecting a period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new gameability that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition can be easily established by the player's own selection, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature A6. One of the allocating means is an external allocating means (allocation unit 220) provided in an area until the game ball fired from the launching means reaches the normal entrance means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the external distribution means is provided in the route until the game ball reaches the normal ball entry means. For this reason, it is possible to pay attention to the process until the game balls distributed to the external distribution means reach the normal ball entering means.

  Feature A7. The external allocating means includes a first area (inner area R1) in which the game ball easily enters the first operation trigger means when the game ball enters the normal entry means, or the game ball. The game ball is distributed to a second area (outside area R2) where the game ball easily enters the second operation trigger means when the ball enters the normal ball entry means. Game machines.

  According to the feature A7, the game balls are distributed to the first area or the second area by the external distribution means. For this reason, the player can distribute the game balls to the first region or the second region without changing the manner of launching the game balls. That is, the player causes the game ball to enter the first operation trigger means or the second operation trigger means when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means without changing the manner in which the game ball is fired. Can do.

  Feature A8. The external distribution means is disposed in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state rotated by a predetermined angle in a first circumferential direction, and The game ball is guided to the second region by rotating up to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction opposite to the direction, and the game ball launched from the launching unit is guided in the second circumferential direction by a predetermined angle. The characteristic A7 according to claim A7, further comprising a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the first area by receiving the rotated ball and rotating the first circumferential direction to a predetermined angle. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A8, the game balls can be distributed by the distribution member common to the first area or the second area. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which guides a game ball to the 1st field side and the member which guides the game ball to the 2nd field side are provided separately, reduction of a number of parts can be aimed at.

Feature A9. The external distribution means is configured by arranging a plurality of the distribution members along the flow-down direction of the game ball,
The plurality of sorting members receive the gaming ball in a state in which the sorting ball on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the second region by rotating to the second region, so that the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is arranged so as to be received in a rotated state.

  According to feature A9, the game ball is guided to the downstream sorting member by being guided from the upstream sorting member to the second region side. For this reason, the number of distribution paths of the game balls can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (if the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2). ), The probability of game balls distributed to the first area or the second area can be easily changed according to the gaming machine.

Feature A10. In the state where the distribution member is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, the first passive portion (first housing portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction and in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction A second passive part (second accommodating part 229) for receiving the game ball,
After the first passive part rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received in the second passive part, the external distribution means is configured to receive the game ball in the second passive part. The second passive portion is prevented from rotating in the first circumferential direction until the first passive portion is received, and the second passive portion is rotated in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. , A rotation restricting means (base-side magnet 230) that prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction until the game ball is received by the first passive portion. The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or A9, further comprising a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

  According to the feature A10, since the rotation restricting means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and then receiving the game ball before receiving the game ball. Is suppressed. That is, turning without receiving the game ball is suppressed. For this reason, the malfunction that a game ball is continuously induced | guided | derived to a 1st area | region or a 2nd area | region can be suppressed.

  Feature A11. The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the external distribution means distributes the game balls to the first area or the second area at predetermined intervals.

  According to the feature A11, the player selects a period and fires the game ball so as to reach the external distribution means so that the game ball is distributed to either the first region or the second region. Can be selected. That is, the player can select which of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied when the game ball enters the normal entry means. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new gameability that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition can be easily established by the player's own selection, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A12. The first actuation trigger means has a plurality of first actuation trigger means constituent members (1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a, 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b), Making the first acquisition condition easy to be satisfied by entering different game balls into each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members,
The second operation trigger means includes a plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members (2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71a, 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71b), The feature A2 to A11 according to any one of the features A2 to A11, wherein the second acquisition condition is easily established by entering different game balls into each of the plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A12, the first operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by allowing a game ball to enter each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members. Similarly, a 2nd operation opportunity means makes it easy to satisfy | fill 2nd acquisition conditions, when a game ball enters each of several 2nd operation opportunity means structural member. For this reason, in order to make it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition for the player, it is possible to give a game property that a game ball is inserted into each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. In order to make it easy to do so, it is possible to give a game property that a game ball is inserted into each of the plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members, and it is possible to diversify the game property.

  Feature A13. Whether at least one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by entering a plurality of the game balls into the first operation trigger means, Alternatively, any one of features A2 to A12 is characterized in that the second acquisition condition is easily established by entering a plurality of the game balls into the second operation trigger means. Game machines.

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to diversify the gameability until the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A14. The first operation opportunity means and the second operation opportunity means are different from each other in ease of entering the game ball,
One of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means is easy for the game ball to enter, while one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means receives the game ball. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the gaming machine operates when more gaming balls enter than the difficult other.

  According to the feature A14, the operation trigger means that the game ball is easy to enter is activated when more game balls enter than the operation trigger means that the game ball is difficult to enter. For this reason, it can suppress that only one of the operation trigger means becomes easy to operate. That is, it can be suppressed that only one of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied.

Feature A15. The first acquisition condition may be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first operation trigger means.
In any one of the features A2 to A14, the second acquisition condition can be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second operation trigger means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A15, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the first operation trigger means, the game ball enters the first operation trigger means and the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied. Or the first acquisition condition may be satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method for launching a game ball in order to facilitate the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a method for launching the game ball in order to satisfy the first acquisition condition. There is no need to change (launching operation).

  Similarly, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the second operation trigger means, the game ball enters the second operation trigger means and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, or There is a possibility that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method of launching a game ball (a launch operation) in a method of launching a game ball to facilitate the establishment of the second acquisition condition and a method of launching to fulfill the second acquisition condition. ) No need to change.

  That is, according to the feature A15, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of making the first acquisition condition easy to be satisfied and the action of making the second acquisition condition easy to be established are bothersome. The first acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first operation trigger means, and the first acquisition condition is established by the launched game ball. Any of the launched game balls entering the first operation opportunity means may possibly be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the first acquisition condition may enter the first operation trigger means, or the first acquisition may be performed by a game ball that has not entered the first operation trigger means. The condition may be satisfied. Similarly, the second acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second operation opportunity means, and the second acquisition condition is established by the launched game ball. And, it may be possible that either of the launched game balls enters the second operation opportunity means may be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the second acquisition condition may enter the second operation trigger means, or the second acquisition may be performed by a game ball that has not entered the second operation trigger means. The condition may be satisfied.

Feature A16. First main detection means (left-side discharge passage detection sensor 68a, first left-side discharge passage detection sensor 68a1, second left-side discharge passage detection sensor) that enters the first operation trigger means or detects the game ball that has entered the ball 68a2),
Second main detection means (right discharge passage detection sensor 69a, first right discharge passage detection sensor 69a1, second right discharge passage detection sensor that enters the second operation trigger means or detects the game ball that has entered the second operation trigger means. 69a2),
It is determined whether the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally based on the detection result of the first main detection means, and the second acquisition condition is determined based on the detection result of the second main detection means. An abnormality determination means (a function for executing the processes of S402 and S408 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for determining whether or not it is easily established abnormally;
When the abnormality determination means determines that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, a game stop means for executing a game stop process (S406 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) , A function of executing the processing of S413), and the gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

  According to the feature A16, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game from being continued while the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally for some reason, and it is possible to suppress the loss of game play.

  Feature A17. The abnormality determination unit determines whether or not the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the first main detection unit, and determines that the first acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. If the first acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and whether or not the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the second main detection unit. If the second acquisition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied abnormally. The gaming machine according to Feature A16.

  According to the feature A17, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that the abnormality is detected when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established with a simple configuration.

Feature A18. The first main detection means detects the game ball after entering the first operation trigger means, and the second main detection means detects the game ball after entering the second operation trigger means. Detect
Furthermore, a first sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the first operation trigger means, and a second sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the second operation trigger means. And having
The abnormality determination means determines that the number of the game balls detected by the first main detection means and the number of the game balls detected by the first sub detection means do not match. If it is determined that the first acquisition condition is easily established, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, and the number of the game balls detected by the second main detection unit and the first When it is determined that the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied when it is determined that the number of the game balls detected by the second sub-detecting means does not match, the second acquisition condition is abnormally satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature A16 or A17, wherein the game machine is determined to be easy.

  According to feature A18, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls before entering the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means matches the number of game balls after entering the ball If the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied even though the number of game balls to be played does not match, the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally. It is determined that For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally.

Feature A19. Having the common operation trigger means;
The common operation trigger means includes a plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members, and the first acquisition condition and the second condition are obtained when the different game balls enter each of the plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the acquisition condition is easily satisfied.

  According to the feature A19, the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily established by entering the game ball into each of the plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members. For this reason, in order to make the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition easy to be satisfied, it is possible to give a game of entering a game ball into a plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members, and to diversify the game. it can.

  Feature A20. The first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be satisfied when the game ball is fired so as to be able to enter the common operation opportunity means. Gaming machine.

  According to feature A20, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the common operation trigger means, the game ball enters the common operation trigger means and the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are satisfied. Or the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may be satisfied. For this reason, the player can release the game ball to establish the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition, and the method of launching the game ball to easily satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition. There is no need to change the manner of launching the game ball (launch operation).

  That is, according to the feature A20, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that the act of easily making the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is troublesome. The first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the common operation trigger means, and the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is determined by the launched game ball. It may be possible that either the second acquisition condition is satisfied or the launched game ball enters the common operation trigger means may be satisfied first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may enter the common operation trigger means, or the game ball that has not entered the common operation trigger means The first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may be satisfied.

Feature A21. Main detection means (common discharge passage detection sensor 77a) for entering the common operation opportunity means or detecting the game ball that has entered,
Based on the detection result of the main detection means, abnormality determination means for determining whether or not the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are likely to be established abnormally (in S402 and S408 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91). Processing function), and
When the abnormality determination means determines that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, a game stop means for executing a game stop process (S406 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) , A function of executing the processing of S413), and the gaming machine according to feature A19 or A20.

  According to the feature A21, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established abnormally, the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game from being continued while the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally for some reason, and it is possible to suppress the loss of game play.

  Feature A22. The abnormality determination unit determines whether the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily satisfied from the detection result of the main detection unit, and determines that the first acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. If the first acquisition condition is satisfied in this case, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied if it is determined that the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. Then, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and the gaming machine according to Feature A21.

  According to the feature A22, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that an abnormality is detected when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established with a simple configuration.

Feature A23. The main detection means includes sub detection means for detecting the game ball after entering the common operation trigger means and detecting the game ball before entering the common operation trigger means,
The abnormality determination unit determines whether the first acquisition condition or the number of the game balls detected by the main detection unit and the number of the game balls detected by the sub-detection unit do not match. When it is determined that the second acquisition condition is easily established, it is determined that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established abnormally. Game machines.

  According to the feature A23, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls before entering the common operation opportunity means matches the number of game balls after entering, and the number of game balls passing through is one. If the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied despite not having been done, it is determined that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally. For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally.

Feature A24. A first starting entrance portion (first special start opening 57) provided in the gaming area and into which the gaming ball can enter;
A second starting entrance part (second special start opening 58) that is provided in the gaming area and into which the gaming ball can enter and is provided in the first starting entrance part, to the first starting entrance part First opening / closing means (first opening means) capable of switching between an open state that facilitates entry of the game ball and a closed state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting entrance portion from the open state. 1 non-electric actor 66),
An open state that is provided in the second starting ball entering portion and that facilitates entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion, and that the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion. A second opening / closing means (second non-electric actor 67) capable of switching between a closed state that makes it more difficult than the open state;
The first acquisition condition is established by the game ball entering the first start entrance part,
The second acquisition condition is established by the game ball entering the second starting entrance part,
When the common operation trigger means is provided, the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means are switched to the open state based on the game ball entering the common operation trigger means. When the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily established and the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means are provided, the game ball enters the first operation trigger means. The first opening / closing means is switched to the opened state based on the first acquisition condition, and the second opening / closing means is based on the game ball entering the second operation trigger means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, wherein the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied by switching to the open state.

  According to the feature A24, the configuration of the features A1 to A23 can be realized with a simple configuration. And when a player is provided with a common operation opportunity means, a game ball is made to enter into a common operation opportunity means, and the 1st opening and closing part is made into an open state by opening the 1st opening means and the 2nd opening and closing means. Alternatively, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second start entrance part. In addition, when the player includes the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means, the player starts the first operation by causing the first operation trigger means to enter the game ball and opening the first opening / closing means. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the entrance part, and enter the game ball into the second start entrance part by causing the second operation trigger means to enter the game ball and opening the second opening / closing means. Easy to do. For this reason, the player may enter the game ball in the first starting entrance part to make the first special information determination, or enter the game ball in the second start entrance part. The player can select whether or not the second special information is determined to be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(2) Feature B group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a bonus gaming mode such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game mode, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is opened and closed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, There has also been proposed a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the privilege game mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-41547). In such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball enters one of the first start port and the second start port until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the bonus game mode ends. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode (high frequency support mode) that is easy.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the player in the game. The feature B group solves this problem.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (function to execute the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91),
Grant determination means for performing determination of whether or not the acquired first special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information (special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91 is performed). Function to be executed)
When the predetermined main condition is satisfied, the game ball can enter the normal winning opening (59a), and when the predetermined main condition is not satisfied, the normal winning opening is entered. Normal ball entry means (variable normal prize winning device 59) that makes it difficult or impossible to enter the game ball of
A first discharge passage (left discharge passage 68) and a second discharge passage (right discharge passage 69) that communicate with the normal ball entry means and discharge the game balls that have entered the normal ball entry means;
When the game ball discharged from the first discharge passage enters, first operation trigger means (first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70) that makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition;
When the game ball discharged from the second discharge passage enters, second operation trigger means (second non-electric actor operating mechanism 71) that makes it easy to satisfy the second acquisition condition;
Distribution means (partitioning member 59d) for distributing the game ball that has entered the normal ball entry means to the first discharge passage or the second discharge passage;
The allocating means divides the space in the normal winning opening into a first space (left space K1) and a second space (right space K2), and the game ball entering the first space is the first space. 1. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is provided in the normal winning opening so that the game ball discharged from the first discharge passage and discharged into the second space is discharged from the second discharge passage.

  According to feature B1, whether the player fires a game ball so as to enter the first space of the normal prize opening, or does it fire a game ball so as to enter the second space of the normal prize opening By selecting, it is possible to select whether the game ball is discharged from the first discharge passage or the second discharge passage. That is, the player selects whether to launch a game ball so as to enter the first space of the normal prize opening or to fire a game ball so as to enter the second space of the normal prize opening. Thus, it is possible to select which of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is to be easily established. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new game characteristic that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition can be easily established by the player's own selection, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the configuration provided with a start ball entering portion that is provided in a game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, the “information acquisition means” indicates that “a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. Instead of the configuration of “obtaining special information based on”, a configuration of “acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entering portion” may be adopted.

Feature B2. The game area includes a first area (inner area R1) along the traveling direction of the game ball in the area until the game ball launched from the launch means reaches the normal entrance means. And a partition means (partition mechanism 72) for partitioning into a second region (outer region R2),
The partition means passes the first area and the game ball that has entered the normal winning opening enters the first space, and also passes the second area and enters the normal winning opening. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the gaming ball is provided so as to enter the second space.

  According to the feature B2, in the area until the game ball reaches the normal ball entry means, the partition means for partitioning the area into the first area and the second area along the traveling direction of the game ball (flowing direction). Is provided. For this reason, when the player can enter the game ball in the normal ball entry means (ordinary winning opening), the player can aim the first area located in front of the normal ball entry means by firing the game ball. A game ball can be entered into the first space, and a game ball can be entered into the second space by firing the game ball aiming at the second area located in front of the normal entry means. For this reason, it can be suppressed that an acquisition condition different from the acquisition condition desired by the player is easily established.

Feature B3. The first area is an area in which a player is less likely to pass the game ball than the second area,
The portion of the first area through which the game ball fired from the launching means first passes is used as the entrance of the first area, and the game ball fired from the launching means in the second area passes first. When the portion is an entrance of the second area, the opening width of the entrance of the first area is longer than that of the entrance of the second area.

  According to the feature B3, the first area is an area where the player is less likely to pass the game ball than the second area (the area where the player is less likely to aim than the second area), but the entrance of the first area is the second area. The opening width is longer than the entrance. That is, the game ball can easily pass through the first region. For this reason, it can suppress that a game ball | bowl enters a normal winning opening through the area | region which a player does not intend. Therefore, it can further be suppressed that an acquisition condition different from the acquisition condition desired by the player is easily established.

Feature B4. The first discharge passage has a plurality of discharge passages (first left discharge passage 68-1, second left discharge passage 68-2),
The first operation trigger means includes at least one first operation trigger means constituent member (1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a, 1-2 non-electric actor) provided in each of the plurality of discharge passages. A plurality of object actuating mechanism constituent members 70b), and when the game balls are respectively discharged from the plurality of discharge passages and the game balls enter the first operation trigger means constituent members, the first acquisition condition is satisfied. Easy to do,
The second discharge passage has a plurality of discharge passages (first right discharge passage 69-1, second right discharge passage 69-2),
The second operation trigger means includes at least one second operation trigger means constituent member (second non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71a, second non-electric actor) provided in each of the plurality of discharge passages. A plurality of object actuating mechanism constituent members 70b), and when the game balls are respectively discharged from the plurality of discharge passages and the game balls enter the second actuating means constituent members, the second acquisition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the gaming machine is easy to play.

  According to the feature B4, the first operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by allowing a game ball to enter each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members. Similarly, a 2nd operation opportunity means makes it easy to satisfy | fill 2nd acquisition conditions, when a game ball enters each of several 2nd operation opportunity means structural member. For this reason, in order to make it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition for the player, it is possible to give a game property that a game ball is inserted into each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. In order to make it easy to do so, it is possible to give a game property that a game ball is inserted into each of the plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members, and it is possible to diversify the game property.

  Feature B5. Whether at least one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by entering a plurality of the game balls into the first operation trigger means, Alternatively, according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied by entering a plurality of the game balls into the second operation trigger means. Game machines.

  According to the feature B5, it is possible to diversify the gameability until the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature B6. The first operation opportunity means and the second operation opportunity means are different from each other in ease of entering the game ball,
One of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means is easy for the game ball to enter, while one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means receives the game ball. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the gaming machine operates when more gaming balls enter than the other difficult one.

  According to the feature B6, the operation trigger means that the game ball is easy to enter is activated when more game balls enter than the operation trigger means that the game ball is difficult to enter. For this reason, it can suppress that only one of the operation trigger means becomes easy to operate. That is, it can be suppressed that only one of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied.

Feature B7. The first acquisition condition may be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first space,
The second acquisition condition may be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second space, according to any one of the features B1 to B6, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B7, when the game ball is launched so that the player can enter the first space, the game ball is discharged from the first discharge passage after entering the first space of the normal winning opening. There is a possibility that the one acquisition condition is easily satisfied or the first acquisition condition is satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method for launching a game ball in order to facilitate the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a method for launching the game ball in order to satisfy the first acquisition condition. There is no need to change (launching operation).

  In addition, when a game ball is fired so that the player can enter the second space, the game ball is discharged from the second discharge passage after entering the second space of the normal winning opening, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. There is a possibility that the second acquisition condition is satisfied or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method of launching a game ball (a launch operation) in a method of launching a game ball to facilitate the establishment of the second acquisition condition and a method of launching to fulfill the second acquisition condition. ) No need to change.

  That is, according to the feature B7, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of making the first acquisition condition easy to be satisfied and the action of making the second acquisition condition easy to be established are bothersome. The first acquisition condition can be satisfied when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first space, and the first acquisition condition is satisfied by the fired game ball, Any of the played game balls entering the first space may possibly be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the first acquisition condition may enter the first space, or the first acquisition condition is satisfied by a game ball that does not enter the first space. You may make it happen. Similarly, the second acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second space, and the second acquisition condition is established by the launched game ball; Any of the launched game balls entering the second space may possibly be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the second acquisition condition may enter the second space, or a game ball that does not enter the second space satisfies the second acquisition condition. You may make it happen.

Feature B8. First main detection means for detecting the game ball discharged from the first discharge passage (left discharge passage detection sensor 68a, first left discharge passage detection sensor 68a1, second left discharge passage detection sensor 68a2);
Second main detection means for detecting the game ball discharged from the second discharge passage (right discharge passage detection sensor 69a, first right discharge passage detection sensor 69a1, second right discharge passage detection sensor 69a2);
It is determined whether the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally based on the detection result of the first main detection means, and the second acquisition condition is determined based on the detection result of the second main detection means. An abnormality determination means (a function for executing the processes of S402 and S408 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for determining whether or not it is easily established abnormally;
When the abnormality determination means determines that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, a game stop means for executing a game stop process (S406 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) , A function of executing the processing of S413), and the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

  According to the feature B8, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game from being continued while the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally for some reason, and it is possible to suppress the loss of game play.

  Feature B9. The abnormality determination unit determines whether or not the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the first main detection unit, and determines that the first acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. If the first acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and whether or not the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the second main detection unit. If the second acquisition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied abnormally. The gaming machine according to Feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that an abnormality is detected when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established with a simple configuration.

Feature B10. The first main detection means detects the game ball after entering the first operation trigger means, and the second main detection means detects the game ball after entering the second operation trigger means. Detect
Furthermore, a first sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the first operation trigger means, and a second sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the second operation trigger means. And having
The abnormality determination means determines that the number of the game balls detected by the first main detection means and the number of the game balls detected by the first sub detection means do not match. If it is determined that the first acquisition condition is easily established, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, and the number of the game balls detected by the second main detection unit and the first When it is determined that the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied when it is determined that the number of the game balls detected by the second sub-detecting means does not match, the second acquisition condition is abnormally satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature B8 or B9, which is determined to be easy.

  According to the feature B10, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls before entering the first operation opportunity means and the second operation opportunity means coincides with the number of game balls after entering the ball. If the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied even though the number of game balls to be played does not match, the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally. It is determined that For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally.

Feature B11. A first starting entrance portion (first special start opening 57) provided in the gaming area and into which the gaming ball can enter;
A second starting entrance part (second special start opening 58) that is provided in the gaming area and into which the gaming ball can enter and is provided in the first starting entrance part, to the first starting entrance part First opening / closing means (first opening means) capable of switching between an open state that facilitates entry of the game ball and a closed state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting entrance portion from the open state. 1 non-electric actor 66),
An open state that is provided in the second starting ball entering portion and that facilitates entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion, and that the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion. A second opening / closing means (second non-electric actor 67) capable of switching between a closed state that makes it more difficult than the open state;
The first acquisition condition is established by the game ball entering the first start entrance part,
The second acquisition condition is established by the game ball entering the second starting entrance part,
The first acquisition condition is easily established by switching the first opening / closing means to the open state based on the game ball entering the first operation trigger means, and the second operation trigger means. Any one of the characteristics B1 to B10, wherein the second acquisition condition is easily established by switching the second opening / closing means to the open state based on the game ball entering the ball. The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature B11, the configuration of the features B1 to B10 can be realized with a simple configuration. Then, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first starting entrance part by causing the first operation trigger means to enter the game ball and opening the first opening / closing means. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second starting entrance part by causing the means to enter the game ball and opening the second opening / closing means. For this reason, the player may enter the game ball in the first starting entrance part to make the first special information determination, or enter the game ball in the second start entrance part. The player can select whether or not the second special information is determined to be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a bonus gaming mode such as a hit gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game mode, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is opened and closed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, There has also been proposed a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the privilege game mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-41547). In such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball enters one of the first start port and the second start port until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the bonus game mode ends. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode (high frequency support mode) that is easy.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the player in the game. The feature C group solves this problem.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (function to execute the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91),
Grant determination means for performing determination of whether or not the acquired first special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information (special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91 is performed). Function to be executed)
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, common operating trigger means (common non-electric actor operating mechanism 78) that makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition, or a predetermined first condition When the first acquisition condition is satisfied, the first operation trigger means (first non-electric actor operating mechanism 70) that makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second condition that is set in advance are satisfied. Having a second actuation trigger means (second non-electric actor actuating mechanism 71) that facilitates,
When the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, the player determines whether the first acquisition condition is satisfied by adjusting the launch operation or whether the second acquisition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that can be selected.

  According to the feature C1, the player selects whether the first acquisition condition or the second condition that is easily satisfied is adjusted by adjusting the launch operation (adjusting the strength for launching the game ball). it can. For this reason, it is possible to adjust the launch operation so that the player can select whether to establish the first acquisition condition that is easily established or the second acquisition condition that is easily established. Can be granted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the configuration provided with a start ball entering portion that is provided in a game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, the “information acquisition means” indicates that “a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. Instead of the configuration of “obtaining special information based on”, a configuration of “acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entering portion” may be adopted.

Feature C2. The first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means,
The first operating opportunity means that the first condition is established when the game ball enters,
The second operation trigger means is configured such that the second condition is satisfied when the game ball enters,
The first actuation trigger means and the second actuation trigger means may determine whether the player establishes the first condition by adjusting a launch operation when a predetermined main condition is established, or the second condition. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that it can be selected whether or not to be established.

  According to the feature C2, the player adjusts the launch operation (adjusts the strength for launching the game ball) when a predetermined main condition is satisfied, thereby setting either the first condition or the second condition. You can choose whether to establish. That is, it is possible to give the player the ability to select whether the first acquisition condition is easily established or the second acquisition condition is easily established by adjusting the launch operation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C3. The first actuation trigger means has a plurality of first actuation trigger means constituent members (1-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70a, 1-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 70b), The first condition is established by entering different game balls into each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members,
The second operation trigger means includes a plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members (2-1 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71a, 2-2 non-electric actor operating mechanism constituent member 71b), The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the second condition is satisfied when different gaming balls enter each of the plurality of second operation trigger means constituent members.

  According to the feature C3, the first operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition by allowing a game ball to enter each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members. Similarly, a 2nd operation opportunity means makes it easy to satisfy | fill 2nd acquisition conditions, when a game ball enters each of several 2nd operation opportunity means structural member. For this reason, in order to make it easy for the player to satisfy the first acquisition condition, it is possible to give the player the ability to enter a game ball into each of the plurality of first operation trigger means constituent members, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. In order to facilitate the game, it is possible to give a game such that a game ball is inserted into each of the plurality of second operation trigger means constituting members, thereby making it possible to diversify the game.

  Feature C4. At least one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means satisfies the first condition when a plurality of the game balls enter the first operation trigger means, or the first The gaming machine according to C2 or C3, characterized in that the second condition is established when a plurality of the gaming balls enter the two operation opportunity means.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to diversify the gameability until the first condition or the second condition is easily established, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. That is, it is possible to diversify the gameability until the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C5. The first operation opportunity means and the second operation opportunity means are different from each other in ease of entering the game ball,
One of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means is easy for the game ball to enter, while one of the first operation trigger means and the second operation trigger means receives the game ball. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the gaming machine operates when more gaming balls enter than the other difficult one.

  According to the feature C5, the operation trigger means that the game ball is easy to enter is activated when more game balls enter than the operation trigger means that the game ball is difficult to enter. For this reason, it can suppress that only one of the operation trigger means becomes easy to operate. That is, it can be suppressed that only one of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied.

Feature C6. The first acquisition condition may be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first operation trigger means.
In any one of the features C2 to C5, the second acquisition condition can be satisfied when the game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second operation trigger means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C6, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the first operation trigger means, the game ball enters the first operation trigger means and the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied. Or the first acquisition condition may be satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method for launching a game ball in order to facilitate the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a method for launching the game ball in order to satisfy the first acquisition condition. There is no need to change (launching operation).

  Similarly, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the second operation trigger means, the game ball enters the second operation trigger means and the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, or There is a possibility that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. For this reason, the player uses a method of launching a game ball (a launch operation) in a method of launching a game ball to facilitate the establishment of the second acquisition condition and a method of launching to fulfill the second acquisition condition. ) No need to change.

  That is, according to the feature C6, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that the act of making the first acquisition condition easy to be satisfied and the action of making the second acquisition condition easy to be established are bothersome. The first acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the first operation trigger means, and the first acquisition condition is established by the launched game ball. Any of the launched game balls entering the first operation opportunity means may possibly be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the first acquisition condition may enter the first operation trigger means, or the first acquisition may be performed by a game ball that has not entered the first operation trigger means. The condition may be satisfied. Similarly, the second acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the second operation opportunity means, and the second acquisition condition is established by the launched game ball. And, it may be possible that either of the launched game balls enters the second operation opportunity means may be established first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the second acquisition condition may enter the second operation trigger means, or the second acquisition may be performed by a game ball that has not entered the second operation trigger means. The condition may be satisfied.

Feature C7. First main detection means (left-side discharge passage detection sensor 68a, first left-side discharge passage detection sensor 68a1, second left-side discharge passage detection sensor) that enters the first operation trigger means or detects the game ball that has entered the ball 68a2),
Second main detection means (right discharge passage detection sensor 69a, first right discharge passage detection sensor 69a1, second right discharge passage detection sensor that enters the second operation trigger means or detects the game ball that has entered the second operation trigger means. 69a2),
It is determined whether the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally based on the detection result of the first main detection means, and the second acquisition condition is determined based on the detection result of the second main detection means. An abnormality determination means (a function for executing the processes of S402 and S408 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for determining whether or not it is easily established abnormally;
When the abnormality determination means determines that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, a game stop means for executing a game stop process (S406 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) , A function of executing the process of S413), and the gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C6.

  According to the feature C7, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established abnormally, the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing while the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established abnormally for some reason.

  Feature C8. The abnormality determination unit determines whether or not the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the first main detection unit, and determines that the first acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. If the first acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and whether or not the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the detection result of the second main detection unit. If the second acquisition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied abnormally. A gaming machine according to Feature C7.

  According to the feature C8, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that the condition is abnormal when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established with a simple configuration.

Feature C9. The first main detection means detects the game ball after entering the first operation trigger means, and the second main detection means detects the game ball after entering the second operation trigger means. Detect
Furthermore, a first sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the first operation trigger means, and a second sub detection means for detecting the game ball before entering the second operation trigger means. And having
The abnormality determination means determines that the number of the game balls detected by the first main detection means and the number of the game balls detected by the first sub detection means do not match. If it is determined that the first acquisition condition is easily established, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, and the number of the game balls detected by the second main detection unit and the first When it is determined that the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied when it is determined that the number of the game balls detected by the second sub-detecting means does not match, the second acquisition condition is abnormally satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature C7 or C8, wherein the game machine is determined to be easy.

  According to the feature C9, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls before entering the first operation opportunity means and the second operation opportunity means coincides with the number of game balls after entering the ball. If the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied even though the number of game balls to be played does not match, the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally. It is determined that For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally.

Feature C10. Having the common operation trigger means;
The common operation trigger means includes a plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members, and the predetermined condition is established by entering different game balls into the plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, characterized by the above.

  According to the feature C10, the common operation trigger means makes it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition by allowing a game ball to enter each of the plurality of common operation trigger means constituent members. For this reason, in order to make it easy to satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition, it is possible to give the player a game property of entering a game ball into each of the plurality of common operation trigger means component members. Can be achieved.

  Feature C11. The first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be satisfied when the game ball is fired so as to be able to enter the common operation opportunity means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C11, when the game ball is fired so that the player can enter the common operation trigger means, the game ball enters the common operation trigger means and the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are satisfied. Or the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may be satisfied. For this reason, the player can release the game ball to establish the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition, and the method of launching the game ball to easily satisfy the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition. There is no need to change the manner of launching the game ball (launch operation).

  In other words, according to the feature C11, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that the act of facilitating the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is troublesome. The first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be established when a game ball is launched so as to be able to enter the common operation trigger means, and the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is determined by the launched game ball. It may be possible that either the second acquisition condition is satisfied or the launched game ball enters the common operation trigger means may be satisfied first. That is, a game ball that does not satisfy the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may enter the common operation trigger means, or the game ball that has not entered the common operation trigger means The first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition may be satisfied.

Feature C12. Main detection means (common discharge passage detection sensor 77a) for entering the common operation opportunity means or detecting the game ball that has entered,
Based on the detection result of the main detection means, abnormality determination means for determining whether or not the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are likely to be established abnormally (in S402 and S408 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91). Processing function), and
When the abnormality determination means determines that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, a game stop means for executing a game stop process (S406 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) , A function of executing the processing of S413), and the gaming machine according to Feature C10 or C11.

  According to the feature C12, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game from being continued while the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally for some reason, and it is possible to suppress the loss of game play.

  Feature C13. The abnormality determination unit determines whether the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily satisfied from the detection result of the main detection unit, and determines that the first acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied. When the first acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined that the first acquisition condition is abnormally easily established, and when it is determined that the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, the second acquisition condition is satisfied. It is determined that the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally, and the gaming machine according to Feature C12.

  According to the feature C13, when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is determined that an abnormality is detected when the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established with a simple configuration.

Feature C14. The main detection means includes sub detection means for detecting the game ball after entering the common operation trigger means and detecting the game ball before entering the common operation trigger means,
The abnormality determination unit determines whether the first acquisition condition or the number of the game balls detected by the main detection unit and the number of the game balls detected by the sub-detection unit do not match. If it is determined that the second acquisition condition is easily established, it is determined that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is easily established abnormally. Game machines.

  According to the feature C14, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls before entering the common operation opportunity means matches the number of game balls after entering, and the number of game balls passing through is one. If the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied despite not having been done, it is determined that the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally. For this reason, it can be determined with higher accuracy whether the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition is likely to be established abnormally.

Feature C15. Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the first special information to be judged or the second special information corresponds to the success / failure information group A privilege granting means (a function for executing an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting a privilege game mode to a person;
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means is the grant correspondence result, one post-reward game mode is selected from a plurality of post-reward game modes as a post-reward game mode after the bonus game is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, further comprising: a gaming mode selection unit (a function of executing the processing of S705 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91).

  According to the feature C15, the game mode selection means selects one post-reward game mode from among a plurality of post-reward game modes. For this reason, it is possible to give a game property of allowing the player to select whether to establish the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition based on the selected post-reward gaming mode. That is, a game property that allows the player to select whether the first special information is determined to be given or the second special information is given based on the selected post-reward mode. Can be granted. In addition, in the case of having a configuration such as the feature C2, whether the player can easily establish the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition based on the selected post-reward gaming mode. It is possible to give a game of selecting. Therefore, the player's interest in games can be further improved.

Feature C16. When the first special information or the second special information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the application determination, and the result of the application determination by the application determination unit is the application correspondence result, the image is a predetermined pattern. It has a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) which is stopped and displayed by the stop result,
In the pattern display means, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result, the pattern display means is common in at least a part of the plurality of post-reward gaming modes selected by the game mode selection means. The gaming machine according to Feature C15, wherein the design is stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature C16, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the picture display unit is common in at least some of the plurality of post-reward gaming modes selected by the game mode selection unit. The picture is stopped and displayed. That is, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the post-privilege mode from the picture that is stopped and displayed on the picture display means. Therefore, the player is made to guess the post-reward gaming mode by the player himself and selects whether the first special information or the second special information is to be given based on the estimated post-reward gaming mode. It is possible to give a game of playing.

  Feature C17. The pattern display means displays a variation of the pattern corresponding to the grant determination of the first special information or the second special information, and when in the post-reward game mode, The gaming machine according to Feature C16, wherein an indication effect suggesting a mode may be displayed.

  According to the feature C17, the player can infer the bonus post-game mode from the suggestion effect displayed on the picture display means. For this reason, the player's degree of attention to the picture display means can be improved, and as a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C18. When the first special information or the second special information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the application determination, and the result of the application determination by the application determination unit is the application correspondence result, the image is a predetermined pattern. It has a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) which is stopped and displayed by the stop result,
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result, the picture display unit displays a stop result indicating the bonus post-game mode selected by the game mode selection unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C17.

  According to the feature C18, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the stop result indicating the selected after-game mode is displayed on the picture display unit. For this reason, the player can grasp | ascertain correctly the mode after privilege game by the pattern displayed on a pattern display means. Therefore, the game property of allowing the player to select the first special information or the second special information to be determined based on the grasped post-game mode while grasping the post-privilege mode. Can be granted.

(4) Feature D group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a bonus gaming mode such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game mode, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is opened and closed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, There has also been proposed a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the privilege game mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-41547). In such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball enters one of the first start port and the second start port until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the bonus game mode ends. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode (high frequency support mode) that is easy.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the player in the game. The feature D group solves this problem.

Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (function to execute the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91),
Grant determination means for performing determination of whether or not the acquired first special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information (special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91 is performed). Function to execute)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the first special information to be judged or the second special information corresponds to the success / failure information group A privilege granting means (a function for executing an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting a privilege game mode to a person;
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means is the grant correspondence result, one post-reward game mode is selected from a plurality of post-reward game modes as a post-reward game mode after the bonus game is ended. A gaming mode selection means (function to execute the processing of S705 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91).

  According to the feature D1, when the first special information or the second special information is the result of giving, one post-game mode is selected from the plurality of post-game modes. For this reason, the player may be able to experience a plurality of bonus post-game modes. Therefore, the range of games can be widened, and the player's interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, in the configuration provided with a start ball entering portion that is provided in a game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, the “information acquisition means” indicates that “a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. Instead of the configuration of “obtaining special information based on”, a configuration of “acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entering portion” may be adopted.

Feature D2. The plurality of after-game modes include a plurality of high-frequency support modes in which the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily satisfied when a predetermined main condition is satisfied,
The plurality of high-frequency support modes include a plurality of limited high-frequency support modes in which an end condition is set to end the high-frequency support mode when the grant determination is executed a specified number of times.
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the plurality of restricted high-frequency support modes have different termination conditions.

  According to the feature D2, the post-reward gaming mode includes a plurality of high-frequency support modes in which the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition are easily established, and the plurality of high-frequency support modes are different from each other. Multiple restricted frequent support modes with termination conditions are included. For this reason, when shifting to the restricted high-frequency support mode after the bonus game mode, the player can establish the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition according to the transferred restricted high-frequency support mode. It is possible to provide a new gameability that allows the user to select whether or not. In other words, a game in which the player selects whether the first special information is determined to be given or the second special information is decided to be given according to the transferred restricted high-frequency support mode. Sex can be imparted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature D3. In the plurality of restricted high-frequency support modes, as the end condition, the first number of times that the first special information is determined to be given, the second number of times that the second special information is judged to be given, or the second The total number of times that is the sum of the first number and the second number is defined, and at least one of the first number, the second number, or the total number is different from each other, according to the feature D2 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, the number of times that the first special information is determined to be granted reaches the first number when the transition is made to the restricted high-frequency support mode as the after-game mode. When the second number of times is reached, or when the sum of the number of times the first special information is determined to be added and the number of times the second special information is determined to be added reaches the total number of times, the limited high-frequency support mode ends. For this reason, the player can select whether the first special information is determined to be assigned or whether the second special information is determined to be given, so that the restricted high-frequency support mode can be made early. It may be possible to suppress termination. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new game characteristic that the number of times the high-frequency support mode ends is changed by the player's own selection. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature D4. As the lottery mode, the probability that the first special information or the second special information is determined to be the grant correspondence result by the grant determining unit is relatively high in the plurality of post-reward gaming modes. High probability mode and low probability mode are included,
The game mode selection means is based on the special information determined for the grant and the lottery mode when the grant determination is executed when the grant determination result by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to Feature D2 or D3, wherein selection is executed.

  According to the feature D4, the game mode selection means executes selection based on the special information determined to be given and the lottery mode when the first special information or the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result. For this reason, it is said that the player selects whether the first special information is determined to be given according to the lottery mode when the grant is judged or whether the second special information is judged to be given. A new game can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature D5. When the change display corresponding to the grant determination of the first special information is performed and the first special information is the grant correspondence result, a stop result indicating the post-reward gaming mode corresponding to the grant correspondence result is displayed. First result display means (first result display portion 76a) to be displayed;
When the variation display corresponding to the grant determination of the second special information is performed and the second special information is the grant correspondence result, a stop result indicating the post-reward gaming mode corresponding to the grant correspondence result is displayed. Second result display means (second result display portion 76b) to be displayed,
When the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the gaming machine according to the feature D4 is characterized in that the high probability mode may be shifted to the low probability mode without going through the bonus game mode. .

  Like the feature D5, the present invention provides the first result display means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination of the first special information and the second result of displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination of the second special information. It can also be applied to a gaming machine having a result display means. In such a gaming machine, when the first special information or the second special information is the result of granting, the player can determine which privilege by checking the stop result of the first result display means or the second result display means. It is possible to accurately grasp whether the post-game mode has been selected (for example, whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode). However, in the feature D5, when the mode is shifted to the high probability mode as the post-reward game mode, the mode is shifted (falls) to the low probability mode without going through the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, even if the mode is shifted to the high probability mode as the post-reward gaming mode, the special probability may be in the low probability mode when the special information is actually determined. Therefore, between the player who executes the game while confirming the first result display means and the second result display means, and the player who executes the game without confirming the first result display means and the second result display means Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gameability from being different.

Feature D6. When the first special information or the second special information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the application determination, and the result of the application determination by the application determination unit is the application correspondence result, the image is a predetermined pattern. It has a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) which is stopped and displayed by the stop result,
In the pattern display means, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result, the pattern display means is common in at least a part of the plurality of post-reward gaming modes selected by the game mode selection means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the design is displayed in a stopped manner.

  According to the feature D6, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the picture display unit has a common in at least some of the plurality of after-game modes selected by the game mode selection unit. The picture is stopped and displayed. That is, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the post-privilege mode from the picture that is stopped and displayed on the picture display means. Therefore, the player is made to guess the post-reward gaming mode by the player himself and selects whether the first special information or the second special information is to be given based on the estimated post-reward gaming mode. It is possible to give a game of playing.

Feature D7. When the first special information or the second special information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the application determination, and the result of the application determination by the application determination unit is the application correspondence result, the image is a predetermined pattern. It has a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) which is stopped and displayed by the stop result,
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result, the pattern display unit is stopped and displayed with a stop result indicating the post-reward gaming mode selected by the game mode selection unit,
The game mode selection means includes
While selecting the post-reward game mode, as the special game mode, select one special game mode from a plurality of special game modes,
When the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result when in the high probability mode, the player as the bonus game is more than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result when in the high probability mode. It is easy to make a choice that is advantageous to the player, and it is easy to make a choice that is disadvantageous to the player as the bonus post-game mode,
When the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result in the low probability mode, the player as the bonus game is more than the case where the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result in the low probability mode. The game machine according to Feature D4, wherein the game machine is configured so that it is easy to make an unfavorable selection, and the player can easily make a selection that is advantageous to the player as the post-reward gaming mode.

  According to the feature D7, when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the stop result indicating the selected after-game mode is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. For this reason, the player can grasp | ascertain correctly the mode after privilege game by the pattern displayed on a pattern display means. In other words, it is possible to accurately grasp whether the lottery mode of the post-game mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. In the high-probability mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is easier to make a selection that is advantageous to the player as a bonus game than when the second special information becomes the grant response result, and after the bonus game As a mode, it is easy to make a selection that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the low probability mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is easier to make a selection disadvantageous to the player as a bonus game than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, and after the bonus game As a mode, it is easy to make a selection that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, the player can clearly determine whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and whether the player focuses on the bonus game or the bonus game post-mode. It is possible to select whether information is determined to be given or whether the second special information is judged to be given. That is, according to the feature D7, it is possible to give the player a new gameability that the gameability can be changed by the player himself. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  Further, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 26 ... first frame button, 44 ... game ball launching mechanism, 56 ... first start port, 57 ... first special start port, 58 ... second special start port, 59 ... variable normal Prize-winning device, 59a ... Normal winning opening, 59b ... Opening / closing plate, 59d ... Partition member, 66 ... First non-electrical component, 67 ... Second non-electrical component, 68 ... Left discharge passage, 69 ... Right discharge passage, 70 ... 1st non-electric actor operating mechanism, 71 ... 2nd non-electric actor operating mechanism, 78 ... Common non-electric actor operating mechanism, 80 ... Symbol display device, 91 ... Main control device, 92 ... Audio lamp control device, 93 ... Display control device, 112 ... MPU (main side MPU), 113 ... ROM (main side ROM), 114 ... RAM (main side RAM), 152 ... MPU (audio side MPU), 153 ... ROM (audio side ROM) 154 ... RAM (voice side RAM), 162 ... MPU (display side) PU), 163 ... program ROM, 164 ... work RAM, 165 ... VDP.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means for acquiring
A grant determining means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the acquired first special information and the second special information correspond to the success / failure information group in the grant information;
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the first special information to be judged or the second special information corresponds to the success / failure information group A privilege granting means for granting a bonus game mode to a person,
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means is the grant correspondence result, one post-reward game mode is selected from a plurality of post-reward game modes as a post-reward game mode after the bonus game is ended. And a game mode selection means.

Images